《Burning Revenge》 Prologue Since that day, nothing has been the same. When this "thing" hit Earth 200 years ago, we had no idea what was in store for us. The impact caused a shockwave that turned almost all major cities into ruins. The survivors soon began the process of rebuilding. But shortly after they started, the true extent of the catastrophe became apparent. If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. At first, there were only rumors, but it didn''t take long for those rumors to become suspicions and then reality. Some people began to develop strange powers, like throwing fireballs or flying. The number of people with such abilities quickly multiplied, and just as quickly, the truth about their powers came to light. It wasn''t the people who possessed these powers, but the various objects they carried with them. After the impact, these objects absorbed the energy from the "thing," allowing only their rightful owners to use their powers. These items could be anything: furniture, clothing, piercings, organs... Shortly after the discovery of these powers, wars broke out. Governments were established and overthrown. Entire cultures were lost. Even the Earth itself changed its appearance. Soon, only forgotten ruins remained as testimony to the life that once existed. And all this was due to that one incident. Since that day 200 years ago, a new era has begun. The Era of Nyd. 1: A day like any other
Kawao woke up drenched in sweat. He had a nightmare. One like he''d never had before. He found himself suddenly in complete darkness. In front of him appeared a purple vortex, growing larger and larger until it swallowed him. At the very last moment, a blood-red hand shot out from the vortex and grabbed at him. Then he woke up. He glanced briefly out the window before getting up. Today was sunny, with a few scattered clouds. As he got dressed, he wondered about his dream. It wasn''t the first time he''d forgotten the content of a dream shortly after waking. He sighed and left his room. "If I don''t remember it, then it probably wasn''t important," he thought, as he entered the main room of his hut. He had lived there as long as he could remember with his parents. They greeted each other as he sat down next to his father, who was sitting at a small wooden table. His mother was preparing breakfast in the meantime. After enjoying the quiet for a moment, his father spoke up. "So, today is your big day, huh?" he began. "Yes. Today is the day! Today I will become a true hunter!" "But only if you pass the test!" his mother replied. "Do you have any doubts?" "No, of course not. But not everyone passes, you know?" "Yes, but I¡¯m the best in my class. I¡¯ve got this!" "You know what they say: Pride comes before a fall." "And before pride comes success," he proudly retorted to his father. His father just smiled at him and said, "Come on! Get going! Make us and your village proud!" "I will! Father, Mother, I¡¯m off!" They both wished him good luck as he left the hut and was momentarily blinded by the bright sun. Then he made his way to the village chief. The chief lived in the largest hut in the village. As long as he could remember, Kawao had known nothing but his village and its island. As far as he knew, there was nothing beyond it. It was forbidden to question this. Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings. But those who did were bound and placed in a small boat, then banished to the open sea. They were never heard from again. When he arrived at the marketplace, someone suddenly grabbed him from behind. It was a boy named Kin. For some time, Kin had admired Kawao because he was the best young hunter of his year. Kin always talked about how much he wanted to be as big and strong as Kawao. "Today''s your big day, right?" Kin asked. "Yes. I''m on my way to see the chief." "Do you have a moment to go to the beach?" "I think I have a moment. But I can''t stay long." Kin smiled at him and ran off. The beach wasn¡¯t far since the village was built right next to it. The houses were anchored deep in the sand with strong bamboo poles to prevent damage or flooding during storms. The village lay next to the open sea and a large jungle that covered most of the island. There was also a massive mountain in the east and a gorge that started at its base, dividing the island into northern and southern parts. Kawao and Kin now stood on the beach not far from the village, silently watching the sea. Finally, Kin spoke up. "You''ll do great!" "What?" "I mean the test. You''ll do great!" "Why is everyone worried about me? Sure, the test isn¡¯t easy, but that doesn¡¯t mean my chances are bad." "Yeah, I know! But the chances of passing are only about 15 percent." "That¡¯s just a general estimate!" Kin sighed and stared thoughtfully out at the sea. "Do you remember three years ago? When we found your vest here on the beach and you instantly fell in love with it?" "I didn¡¯t fall in love with it! I just think it looks really cool!" he replied, blushing slightly. He was wearing it today. It was a gray vest with a black-and-red flame on the back. It had washed ashore back then. "If there really isn¡¯t anyone else out there, where do our clothes come from?" he wondered. From time to time, various clothing items would wash up on the beach, which, once dried, were worn again. "I¡¯ll miss these times," Kin continued. "You don¡¯t have to!" Kawao replied. "Next year, you can join the training too, and in three years, we can have adventures together again!" Kin just smiled tiredly. A few tears rolled down his cheeks. He quickly turned away so Kawao wouldn¡¯t see him like that. "Go on! Pass the test!" he said before starting to sob. Kawao quickly headed off. "It¡¯s probably best if I get the test over with quickly," he decided and ran to the village chief''s hut, which stood prominently at the northern edge of the marketplace, towering over the other houses in the village. At the entrance, the other candidates were already lined up. Since the chief wasn¡¯t there yet, he wasn¡¯t late. He quickly lined up among the others, pretending he¡¯d been there all along. "Where were you?" one of the candidates whispered to him. "I had some things to do." "Shh!" Slowly, the village chief emerged from his hut. He was very old and needed a staff for support. He calmly surveyed those standing before him and cleared his throat. "My children!" he began. "Today is the day when it will be decided whether you become a hunter or a guardian!" The hunters were specially trained warriors who procured food and other essentials from the jungle and the sea. Their training lasted two years, and only those who could keep up were honored with this role. The guardians stayed in the village all their lives, maintaining it. Food processing, hut repairs, and clothing making were just part of their work. "But unlike during your training, anyone who fails the test today will not be able to re-enter the village. Those who fail will die. Those who succeed will live. This is the test you face today. I will now explain the contents of the test. Then you may begin: You have until noon tomorrow. By then, you must reach the other side of the island and bring me a tooth from Lu''Gosh. Anyone who does this will have passed the test." As soon as he finished explaining, the first candidates rushed off, eager to be the first to reach the goal. Kawao was at the forefront, charging through the jungle thicket with the others. 2: The Dangers of the Island Several hours had passed since the test began, and Kawao was moving slowly but steadily through the undergrowth with a self-carved spear. Shortly after the test started, he found himself in a competition in the jungle. The other candidates tried to stop him, but he managed to evade them all. Meanwhile, he could hear various animals roaring through the thicket. Over the years, the wild animals had seemingly learned when the test took place and took the opportunity to hunt us. Along with the roaring, he could already hear occasional agonized screams. But within minutes, the rest of the participants scattered, each searching for the quickest way to the other side of the island. He had already encountered two wild animals himself. But he had no trouble killing them with his spear. Through his two years of training, he knew how to handle wild animals. Tigers, snakes, poisonous insects, and many others¡ªhe knew how to fight them. "I should be nearing the gorge by now," he thought, and the next moment, he could see it. This gorge was dangerous because you couldn¡¯t see it at first glance when running through the jungle. Many had already fallen to their deaths here. And today, too, he could see some fresh, unrecognizable piles of flesh at the bottom, with vultures feasting on them. Some of the candidates must have forgotten in their excitement. A fatal mistake. He looked around. To his left, he could see an old wooden bridge in the distance. It was the only way to cross the gorge directly, which was why there was often a discussion about renewing it. But the chief always said it was better for us hunters, as we had to move lightly on our feet anyway and could practice on the old bridge. This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it. But someday, it was sure to collapse! Maybe today or tomorrow, and then it would be difficult to renew it. He now stood directly at the entrance. For a moment, he listened to the sounds of the jungle. Apparently, he was the only one nearby. Good! Slowly and carefully, he began to cross the bridge. With every step, the boards creaked ominously, threatening to give way and send him to his death. But he stayed calm. He was halfway across when he suddenly heard a rustling. In front of him, on the other side, a candidate appeared. He smiled darkly at Kawao and quickly ran towards the bridge. Kawao could just make out that the candidate held a sharp stone in one hand. He wanted to bring the bridge down. Without further thought for his own safety, Kawao ran. He tried to reach the end of the bridge in time, but his opponent was too fast. Just a few meters from the goal, he felt the ground give way beneath his feet and he fell. But by running, he fell towards the side of the gorge, and with a lot of luck and skill, he managed to grab hold. Behind him, the bridge collapsed and shattered against the opposite cliff. "That was close!" Slowly but surely, he climbed up. Carefully, he peeked over the edge of the gorge, but the candidate had apparently already fled. Quickly, he climbed onto solid ground and tried to catch his breath. "If I hadn''t run, I''d be dead now!" he realized. He had to throw away his spear to hold onto the wall, but at least he still had his life. "Now I have to take a detour if I go back!" he complained, slowly getting up. He cast an annoyed glance at the mountain to his left, then continued his journey north. --- It was noon when he reached the beach on the northern side of the island. He was the only one there. The candidate who had destroyed the bridge was dead. Kawao had found his corpse, half-eaten by a tiger, on the way. The northern beach, unlike the one at his village, was a large bay protected from the sea by a dangerous reef. There was only one animal capable of swimming through it: Lu''Gosh, the great shark. Every year, young hunters came to this beach to claim one of his teeth as a trophy. Either he would get another meal or a new wound, but every year he was ready for another fight for survival. Kawao took off his vest and buried it a little in the sand. If he was going to fight a shark, he wanted to keep his vest in one piece. Armed with a spear, he slowly entered the water, but soon a current grabbed him and pulled him into the center of the bay. He took a deep breath and then dived. Through the somewhat distant reef, he could see a large shape quickly darting past. But what he couldn''t see was the deep-red ship appearing on the horizon, approaching the island. 3: A Bad Feeling
After Lu''Gosh had made his way through the reef, he rushed towards Kawao at breathtaking speed. His mouth, filled with razor-sharp teeth, was ready to shred him into bite-sized pieces. But Kawao remained calm. He aimed his spear directly at the oncoming mouth and, just before it could snap shut, he threw it with all his might into the shark''s throat. Lu''Gosh roared in pain as he tried to remove the spear from his mouth. He bit it in half but couldn''t pull it out. Kawao seized this moment. He swam quickly towards the shark''s face and punched him in one of his eyes. Once again, Lu''Gosh let out agonizing screams and shortly after, he went blind in both eyes. "Now or never!" Kawao decided. He took a sharp stone he had tucked into his pants and struck the shark''s gums while holding onto its nose. Lu''Gosh went into a frenzy, trying to shake him off, but Kawao held on. He kept hitting the tooth and the gums until he felt it loosen. "Just a little more!" But he had underestimated his opponent. In a final moment of frenzy, Lu''Gosh managed to shake him off and, in the next moment, bit down on him. The shark thought he had finally won, but suddenly he felt a sharp pain in his mouth. He opened it wide, and Kawao, in the nick of time, pulled the spear from his mouth and rammed the tip into the already loosened gum. The tooth was now very loose. Instinctively, he grabbed it and yanked it out of the creature''s mouth in one go. Lu''Gosh hesitated briefly before spitting him out. This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version. Without further attempts to catch his prey, the shark swam away, glad to be free from a prolonged battle. Kawao was relieved that the shark had decided to retreat because when he was bitten, he hadn''t come out unscathed. Some of the razor-sharp teeth had pierced his arms and legs. He could still move them, but the saltwater was starting to burn in his wounds, and he knew he had to get out of the water quickly before he bled to death. --- A short while later, he heaved his injured body out of the water. He needed to treat himself quickly and limped towards the jungle. He gathered some leaves and picked a few purple plants. He crushed the plants and applied them to his wounds, which he then covered with the leaves. "I have more than enough time to get back. I should take the opportunity to rest and heal my wounds." He went back to where he had buried his vest and dug it out. As he dusted it off, he noticed something unusual. He turned towards the village. Thick black smoke clouds were rising from the area! "What¡¯s going on? Did someone accidentally set a house on fire?" he wondered. "Maybe I should hurry." Limping, he made his way south, still holding the broken spear in his hands. But he didn¡¯t head back to the destroyed bridge; instead, he headed towards the large mountain in the east. There was a tunnel that ran through the mountain, providing an alternative to the bridge. However, this tunnel hadn¡¯t been used in years. "Who knows what¡¯s living in there now?" --- He quickened his pace despite his injuries. His wounds didn¡¯t bother him at the moment. Before long, he reached the mountain and began searching for the tunnel. Shortly thereafter, he found it. A small natural entrance in the massive rock. Without hesitation, he entered. Inside, it was pitch dark. Even though he couldn''t see anything, he ran forward and immediately banged his head against a wall. "Damn! I should wait a bit to adjust to the darkness," he decided. --- A few minutes later, he proceeded cautiously. He could see better now. At least well enough to find his way. As far as he knew, this tunnel had been dug over a hundred years ago. But since it had hardly been used in recent times, he could only hope it hadn¡¯t collapsed in the meantime. --- After what felt like an eternity, he felt a fresh breeze. He was nearing the exit. But at the same time, he also heard an increasingly loud screeching and squeaking. "I should hurry!" He started running. By now, he had adjusted to the darkness. Suddenly, he saw a light and sprinted towards it. Shortly after he burst through the exit, a huge swarm of bats rushed out of the tunnel. They flew in circles for a while before racing back into their territory. "That was close!" But he had no time to ponder the animals. He had to keep going. Something terrible could be happening in the village. At least, he had a feeling that grew stronger with every step. --- By evening, after several hours, he reached the edge of the jungle. Now he could finally see what was happening in the village. He was paralyzed with shock. The entire village was in flames! 4: Tragedy For a moment, he stood there motionless. Then reality hit him, and he started running. "What happened? Maybe there are survivors!" he thought as he ran through the burning rubble. His injuries didn¡¯t matter. He ignored the pain. The only thing that mattered at that moment was the safety of the villagers and his family. He came to a halt in the marketplace. He sank to his knees. In front of the burning house of the village chief lay a large, flaming pile of bodies. At the entrance of the hut, the old man was impaled on a stake. What was left of them was unrecognizable. He couldn¡¯t identify his family or anyone else. Suddenly, he heard footsteps behind him. A stranger! He was wearing a bright red uniform and carried a blood-stained spear. "Hmm? Did we miss someone?" he said, approaching Kawao with his spear raised. As he struck, Kawao dodged and rammed the broken spear into the stranger''s neck. The man collapsed, choking and coughing. Shortly after, more people emerged from the smoke and flames. They all wore the same uniform. Furious, Kawao stood up, holding the broken spear tightly. "What have you done?" "A survivor? He¡¯s armed! Let¡¯s kill him!" They attacked him. The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. Instinctively, he dodged their spears and struck them down one by one. Gradually, they fell to the ground. But eventually, they overpowered him and pinned him down. They kicked the spear out of his hand and dragged him away. "Are they going to throw me onto the pile with the others?" he wondered. Desperately, he tried to break free, but it was futile. Suddenly, they stopped. He looked up. They were at the beach. On the shore lay a dark red ship bristling with cannons. But he didn¡¯t focus on that; instead, he looked at the man standing before him. He was a fat man who barely fit into his uniform. He wore heavy black gloves that looked too heavy for him. "Who is this?" the man asked his soldiers in an annoyed tone. "We found him in the village. Apparently, he had been hiding!" "Hiding, huh? I thought you told me you had killed everyone! Did you lie to me? Did you betray your country for nothing?" "N-No, sir! I¡¯m sorry. We must not have searched thoroughly enough!" "Hmm. Yes, you didn¡¯t! And now look what happened because of it. This piece of trash here killed ten of our men! And all because YOU didn¡¯t search thoroughly enough for survivors! I will make you pay for your betrayal later!" "Y-Yes, sir!" The man now looked down at Kawao. "And you, I will send you to join the rest of your people!" he said, holding the glove in front of Kawao¡¯s face. The soldiers held him down with their spears. Suddenly, a fireball shot out of the man¡¯s palm, just moments away from reducing Kawao to ashes. ,Fight!¡ä Suddenly, a white flash struck Kawao, and the next moment, he stood several meters in front of the fat man who had just tried to kill him. In the spot where he had been kneeling, there was now a small crater. "What? How did I do that? What is this feeling? It¡¯s like I¡¯ve become much stronger." The fat man looked at him in surprise, but quickly regained his composure. "Hey, you didn¡¯t tell me this guy could use Nyd." "We... We didn¡¯t know either!" "Oh, really? Go back to the ship! I will deal with him personally! I will deal with you later for your mistakes!" "Y-Yes, sir!" The soldiers ran quickly to the shore, where some small boats lay, to get back to their ship. The man turned back to Kawao. "I¡¯m surprised that someone out here can use Nyd. That also explains how you were able to overpower my men. It would be better if I took you seriously and finished you off here and now!" he said. Once again, he aimed his gloves at him and fired several fireballs. But now Kawao could easily dodge them. It felt like the projectiles were coming at him in slow motion. Suddenly, he saw an opportunity. Kawao ran at him and punched him with all his might in his fat belly. The punch caused a small shockwave, and his opponent was hurled against his own ship, which exploded and collapsed shortly after. His men, who were back on the ship, died with him. Completely out of breath, Kawao looked at what he had done, but it left him feeling cold. Slowly, he walked back to the burning pile of bodies and sank to his knees before it. Shortly after, he began to cry. And he didn¡¯t stop until the fire died down. 5: What Remains The Next Morning. When the last fires had finally died down, he stood up again. He walked towards one of the burned-down houses, which stood a bit apart from the rest of the village. Tools were stored there. He searched through the remains and, to his surprise, found a shovel that had survived the blaze. With it, he set to work digging a large hole near the charred pile of bodies. "I must at least give them a grave! It''s the least I owe them!" he thought continuously while working. He didn''t finish until the evening. He spent the entire night carrying the burnt bodies into the hole and covering it back up. As the sun peeked over the horizon the next morning, he placed the final "gravestones," made from the half-burnt remains of the houses. Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. Then he waited. After 54 minutes of silence, one for each deceased, he set off to search the destroyed ship on the coast. "Don''t worry, everyone! I will avenge you! Maybe I''ll find some clues in the wreck about who these people were," he thought. Among the wreckage lay several dead soldiers. Their boss was among them. His gloves were still smoking, and he had a hole in his stomach from which his organs spilled out. Everywhere in the debris, he found a specific emblem, depicting a two-headed phoenix. Did they belong to a larger organization? Later, he also found a map showing part of a large island and a compass. After his search, he took some intact wooden boards and started building a small boat. By nightfall, he was almost finished. It should be ready by tomorrow morning. He entered the burnt remains of his house and lay down with some wooden boards as a bed and a few leaves as a blanket. Before he fell asleep, he thought about various things. "I will find the one responsible for this! But what was that strange power I unleashed? That fat guy called it ''Nyd.'' I''ve never heard of it. And those gloves he wore were pretty mysterious too. They were broken after the fight, otherwise, I would have taken a closer look. ... Tomorrow, I will travel to the place beyond the sea from where these barbarians came. I will find the one responsible for this! And I will bring justice for you!" The next morning, he finished building the boat and set sail, searching for the one who destroyed everything he loved. 6: A Journey into the Unknown Three days after his departure, Kawao was on the brink of starvation. He regretted not packing more supplies before setting off. He realized this bitterly now. Aside from the compass and the map, he had also taken a net and a spear. In the past few days, he had tried to catch fish with the spear, but to no avail. He also didn¡¯t have any water with him. He wouldn''t last much longer. Suddenly, something shook the boat. He quickly looked into the water but saw nothing. "Am I hallucinating already?" he wondered. But then something hit the boat from below, launching it into the air and shattering it upon impact. Now he was adrift in the open sea! He didn¡¯t care that his belongings were sinking into the sea. Instinctively, he managed to grab his spear in mid-air. He dived and looked around, searching for the source of the disturbances. Suddenly, a glowing column of water approached him, and he narrowly avoided it. If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. He resurfaced. "Something down there is targeting me! If I don¡¯t deal with it, it won¡¯t let me continue. Not that I can continue sailing anyway," he decided. After calming himself, he took a deep breath and began another dive. This time, he aimed for the source. Now he had a rough idea of its location. Quickly but cautiously, he swam toward the sea floor. During his hunter training, his breathing was trained to allow him to dive for up to five minutes without issues. Slowly, he could make out the bottom. As well as his opponent. Among some corals, a large bright red crab was hiding, with holes in its pincers. It likely shot those water columns from them. His suspicion was confirmed when the crab shot another column at him. Once again, he narrowly avoided it. Seeing him dodge, the crab foamed in rage and immediately fired more projectiles at him. "Can I do this?" he wondered. Just before he was hit, he remembered the power he had used during the attack on his village. "I have to try!" He quickly focused on his legs, and the next moment, he felt a surge of energy flow into them. With this newfound strength, he could easily dodge. He used a brief moment of the crab''s confusion to gather strength in his arm and threw his spear with all his might. Faster than the crab''s projectiles, the spear shot through the water and precisely severed its left claw. "Damn! I missed!" But upon seeing its severed claw, the crab retreated, leaving him behind. "I must have scared it off!" Suddenly, he realized he was running out of air. He quickly made his way back to the surface. The higher he ascended, the more he felt the energy drain from his legs and arm. When he finally breathed in fresh air again, he could barely keep himself afloat. His legs and arm were numb. And the remnants of his boat were nowhere to be seen. 7: Captain John Suddenly, he saw something approaching him. A ship! "If I can manage to swim close to it, they might see me!" With the last of his strength, he slowly swam towards the ship. But just before he could reach it, he started losing consciousness. The last thing he heard were some shouting voices. --- He woke up. He bolted upright and looked around. He was on the ship. There was no one else in the room but himself. He was lying in a hammock. When he tried to stand up, he felt that his legs and arm were still somewhat paralyzed. "Does this ability consume so much of my physical strength?" he wondered. For the moment, he lay back down. "What kind of ship is this? Who are these people who fished me out of the sea? Are they enemies? Probably not. Otherwise, they would have tied me up or thrown me into a cell... or killed me. They certainly wouldn''t have left me in a hammock. So, they are at least friendly... for now." This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report. He waited for a while longer and then tried to get up again. This time, he managed it! At least partially. He was still quite unsteady on his feet. Slowly, he hobbled towards a door that led to the deck outside. He opened it and found himself on a deck full of sailors, all busy with various tasks. Just by looking at them, he could tell they weren¡¯t those "soldiers." "Hey, Captain! He''s awake!" someone suddenly shouted, and shortly afterward, a tall man with an eye patch approached him. The man smiled at him slyly. "So, you¡¯re the castaway, huh?" he began. "Yes, that¡¯s me. And who are you?" "Me? I¡¯m the captain of this ship! You can call me John, just like everyone else does." "John, huh? Why did you pick me up?" "Why do you ask? We would never ignore a castaway, whether friend or foe." ,So they¡¯re not after me. Good!¡ä "And who are you, Mister Stowaway?" "I¡¯m Kawao." "Kawao. Welcome aboard our ship. Tell me, how did you end up in this situation?" John asked. ,Should I tell them? I think I should, but I should try to be careful,¡ä he decided. "After my home island was attacked by... pirates, I decided to seek revenge on them. But my boat was destroyed by a giant red crab." ,That should be good enough!¡ä John thought for a moment, then replied, "I understand that you¡¯re out for revenge. You¡¯re not the only one on this ship whose life has been ruined by pirates... But neither I nor anyone else here would advise you to seek revenge. We¡¯ve all left those thoughts behind and moved on with our lives... As for that crab, it must have been a fire crab. You¡¯re lucky to have escaped it. We can take you to the next port. From there, you¡¯ll have to figure out your next steps. But only if you help out on our ship, understood?" "Sure thing. Gladly!" And so, Kawao set off on his journey to the nearest island: Isulon. 8: What the World Offers You Two days after Captain John had picked up Kawao, he had adapted well to life on the ship. Shortly after agreeing to help out on the ship, Kawao asked the captain what they were doing, why, and where they were sailing. The question seemed to surprise John, and he quickly realized that Kawao knew nothing about the world. He then took Kawao to his cabin to explain. John told him about a vast continent called "Unas," which had four countries that had been at war with each other on and off for the past 200 years. Over time, the largest of these conflicts became known as the "Three Wars of the Lost." The last one had ended just 15 years ago, and since then, there had been a fragile peace. John and his crew were part of a trading company from the country of "Kasaka," also known as the "Land of the Iron Flame." This country was ruled by an emperor and a strict military dictatorship and was located in the southeast of the continent. Currently, they were in the waters south of Kasaka, where the only "civilized" place was the island of Isulon. They were sailing there to gather supplies before continuing to the great eastern port of the country, Karuni. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. After this explanation, Kawao was trained and gradually learned how to sail a large ship. In his free time, he tried to understand his ability better and quickly realized that he could gather and use the energies of the environment. So far, he had only strengthened his body with it, but if he learned to control the energy better, it could open up many possibilities. While attempting this, he also trained his body in hopes of being able to gather more energy. --- One afternoon, while training in the storage room, the ship was suddenly shaken by an impact. He quickly ran up to see what was happening. "A fire crab is attacking! Watch out!" someone shouted. He reached the deck. Another tremor. The crew was running around wildly, looking for cover when suddenly a column of water shot up from the starboard side (right) and revealed a large bright red crab with a single right claw, which it used to cling to the railing. ,If this thing fires directly at the ship, we''re done for!¡ä he thought. He sprinted towards the crab, gathering as much energy as possible in his right arm. With a mighty punch, he not only knocked the crab overboard but also left a large hole in its body. "That should hopefully not cause us any more trouble." He looked at his arm. He could still move it, but another punch like that would leave it paralyzed again. John came running up to him. "I didn''t know you could use Nyd!" he shouted. "Nyd, what''s that?" "Right, you don''t know about any of this. Nyd is a special power that some people possess. It settles in various objects and can then be used by their owners. What''s your Nyd object?" "I don''t know." "Hmm. Well, you''ll figure it out! Thanks for saving us. We owe you one." "Ah, it''s nothing." So they continued sailing peacefully until... "Land ho! Isulon ahead!" the lookout suddenly called out. Three days had passed since John had picked up Kawao. 9: Arrival at Isulon Finally, they had reached Isulon. From a distance, Kawao could see the island¡¯s port city nestled along the coast. Never in his life had he seen so many buildings. Once they docked at the harbor, he wanted to explore the city as quickly as possible, but John held him back. "Hold your horses, young man!" he said. "I know you want to explore the city right away, but I need you to promise me something first!" "Depends on what you want me to promise," Kawao replied. The tension was palpable. "I want you to promise me not to mess with the pirates! Their base is on the other side of the island, and I know how much you hate them, but even with your Nyd... if you go there alone, you''ll only get yourself killed. You seem like a good guy, and I¡¯d hate to see you rush to your death if I could prevent it. So please... promise me!" Kawao paused for a moment before answering. "I promise! I won¡¯t mess with the pirates!" ,Besides, they weren¡¯t the ones who attacked my village. I¡¯ve seen them sail past our island before. They never showed any interest in us.¡ä Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. John sighed in relief. "Good. That''s a load off my mind. It¡¯s been bothering me the entire journey." "Not just you, Captain," called one of the crew. He smiled at his crew. "Now that that''s settled. Do you even know where you''ll be staying tonight?" ,Ugh! I haven¡¯t thought about that!¡ä "No, I don¡¯t know yet!" "I thought so! Here, take this." He handed him a small pouch with some coins in it. "There¡¯s a good inn here, very popular on the island. It¡¯s called ¡®The Great Crab.¡¯ We¡¯ll be staying there tonight too. This should cover one or two nights." "I can¡¯t accept this." "Yes, you can! You¡¯ve earned it! I don¡¯t know what your plans are, but if you want to get to the mainland, you need to find out when the next ship leaves. Of course, you can also sail with us if you want. You¡¯ve earned a place in our crew!" Kawao didn¡¯t know what to say. He had never expected to meet people outside his island who were as kind as John and his crew. "Thank you!" he managed to say hesitantly before heading towards the city. He didn¡¯t know how he could ever repay them for their kindness, but he knew he would find a way.
He walked through the streets with eager anticipation, hoping to see things he had never dreamed of. But soon, he noticed that something was wrong. The streets looked grim and decayed. There were hardly any people outside, and those who were seemed sick and intimidated. Was he scaring them? Sure, his appearance set him apart from the people here, but he didn¡¯t expect it to be this extreme. Suddenly, he bumped into a man. "Oh, sorry!" he said quickly. The man looked at him, and Kawao was startled. The man''s face was swollen and disfigured as if his fear had manifested physically. The man chose to ignore him and quickly ran away. Now he saw it! All the people outside had disfigured faces. What was going on here? Was this a disease? 10: The Nun Gradually, the people fled into their homes. They were obviously afraid of him. ,What is going on?¡ä he wondered. ,Why are they all afraid of me, and why do they all look like that? I don''t think that''s normal!¡ä He continued cautiously through the streets. Now no one was outside. It was deathly silent. Suddenly, something caught his eye. In a side alley, there was something lying there, but he couldn''t quite make it out. He walked closer, slowly. Just before he could get a better look at the object, someone placed a hand with long, bony fingers on his shoulder. It felt ice-cold, and a shiver ran down his spine. He turned around. Standing before him was an old nun, her face so heavily veiled that he couldn''t see it. Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. "Can I help you, my child?" she asked in a fragile, brittle tone. "I... I''m just looking around," he replied. "Oh, that might not be such a good idea." "Why not?" "Well, the pirates have been attacking more frequently lately, and now the people here are quite afraid of... ahem... new faces." "Oh, I see. But what''s with their faces?" "Well, a new, unknown disease has been spreading here recently. I hope you can understand why the people are, well, a bit more cautious." "I think I understand." "It''s not safe out here. Come with me. There''s a place where people seek refuge, and where it is, well, safe from the disease." He hesitated for a moment. "Can I trust her? Maybe. Her story does sound somewhat plausible. I can ask the people there where the inn is." "Alright! I''ll come with you!" he agreed. "Good!" she replied and shuffled away. He followed her. The further they ventured into the city, the more desolate it looked. A fog was also beginning to rise. After a while, they arrived at an old, decrepit church. She opened the door and gestured for him to enter. "Are you also infected with this disease?" he asked before stepping inside. "Unfortunately, yes. Usually, I don''t go in, but I need to explain to the dear people that you are not a threat to them," she explained. He slowly entered the church. ,Does this still make sense?¡ä he wondered as the doors creaked shut behind him. 11: The Ambush He looked around. It was very dark, but he could still see that the church, both inside and out, had not been used for a long time. Many of the benches were broken, and some of the windows were cracked or shattered. But one thing he noticed immediately. No one was seeking refuge here! Had he been lured into a trap? "Are you sure there''s someone here?" he asked as he turned around. But the nun had disappeared. He looked around. It was quiet, too quiet. He walked slowly between the pews, mentally preparing for an ambush. When he was halfway through, he suddenly heard a faint crack from the ceiling. He looked up, and the nun flew at him, attacking with a knife. He managed to grab her arm before the knife could reach him. This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it. But she remained suspended in the air, motionless. "Well, you''re better than I thought." "Thanks. But what the hell is going on here?" "But only for a little longer!" She pulled her arm back, and suddenly something cut into Kawao''s hand. He quickly released his grip. She landed behind him, near the entrance of the church. He glanced at his hand. It was cut! He looked back at her. "Did you really think I was unarmed?" she asked, pulling up her sleeves. All over her arm were small blades. "For your quick reaction, you are far too careless," she said. "Time to end this before we attract too much attention." She raised her right arm, which began to undergo an impressive metamorphosis before his eyes. It started to swell and grow larger and bulkier until a large lump of flesh, almost like a hammer, was aimed at him. "Too bad. This was really fun!" She struck. "WAIT!" She stopped just short of him. Suddenly, he heard slow footsteps behind him, echoing through the entire church. A man in pitch-black robes and hair stepped forward. His dark circles were as deep as his hair. He seemed very bored. "You do not have the right to judge him!" he spoke calmly. Suddenly, the nun knelt down. "My bishop!" she said, slightly fearful. "The master wants to see him!" he explained to her. A tremendous thunder filled the church, and suddenly the ground beneath Kawao gave way, and he fell into a deep black hole.
The man looked down at the nun. "Do not fear, my child! For you have not acted wrongly. However, I will punish you for your shortsightedness in this matter." "As you wish, my bishop!" she replied without looking up. 12: Darkness It felt like he was falling forever. At some point, he no longer knew which way was up or down. ,I need to protect myself with energy, or the impact will kill me!¡ä He quickly gathered energy and held it together, hoping it would be enough to cushion his fall. Shortly after, he landed on something. It was soft and felt like it was stretching under his impact. For a moment, he felt safe. But then it tore, and he fell again. This time, however, he came to a slow stop, even though he hadn''t landed. He was floating. Stars appeared all around him. It was as if he were floating in the void of space itself. Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author. For a while, nothing happened. Then he slowly but surely felt like he was being watched. One of the stars slowly came closer. He quickly realized it wasn''t a star but a giant eye. And not just that one. All the other stars also approached him and revealed themselves to be eyes, staring at him with razor-sharp blood-red pupils. Soon, he was surrounded by eyes on all sides. "Hm. So you are the new one!" he heard a deep, dark voice coming from all directions. "Who... Who or what are you?" "That is not important. What is important is what is inside you!" Kawao felt completely exposed. "Hm. Interesting! That explains a lot. It seems I can''t just ignore you, Kawao!" "How do you know my name?" "Oh, I know much more than just your name. But that''s not why you''re here!" "Then why am I here?" "I just wanted to get a look at you. Hahaha! Just kidding. Or maybe not. You have piqued my interest, and now I know why! You could be very useful to me. But for now, I''ll leave you alone. I''ll be watching your progress with great interest!" Then the eyes closed, and he once again felt like he was falling. But now he was falling faster and faster. He lost all sense of space and time until he saw a small dot, which quickly revealed itself to be an approaching planet. He tried to prevent his impact. But instead of crashing into the planet like a fly on a car windshield, he suddenly found himself on the streets of Isulon again. He was lying in the middle of the street. Drenched in sweat, he got up and looked around. People were out and about again. And no one had lumps on their faces. ,What was that?¡ä he wondered. 13: Rumors
It felt as if he had almost died from fear. Slowly, he tried to stand up again and calm his breathing. ,Did that really just happen?¡ä he wondered. Some people looked at him questioningly. One approached him and asked, "Are you okay?" Kawao looked at him briefly. "Yes. Yes, I''m fine, thank you." Just as the man was about to walk away, he stopped him. "Um, excuse me?" "Yes?" "Can you tell me where the inn ''The Great Crab'' is?" "It''s not far from here. Just down the street at the corner." "Thank you." He slowly made his way in the indicated direction.
Halfway there, he passed a pub that looked very old and rustic. Something told him he should go in there. ,Maybe I can pick up some interesting information there!¡ä If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. He entered the pub. Inside, there wasn''t much going on. Only a few older men were sitting at the bar, focusing solely on their drinks. He sat down with them. Slowly, they turned towards him. "Who are you?" one of them asked. "I''m just a... tourist," he replied. The equally older bartender came over to him and asked, "And what does the gentleman tourist want here?" "Beer." "You shall have it!" he replied and turned to his taps. Slowly, the mood lightened, and the other guests began to converse again. "Have you heard anything new about Nagasa?" "The country that almost completely isolated itself since the last war? No, why?" "Well, I¡¯ve heard rumors that ships have been disappearing in their waters!" "Oh, those are just rumors. Someone probably wants to protect their ''personal'' sea routes." "Could be." "Nagasa? John told me about that country! It''s supposed to be west of Kasaka." The bartender placed his beer in front of him. Suddenly, he overheard a very interesting conversation. "Do you think the new emperor is doing a good job?" "Well, I heard his father barely taught him anything." "Where did you hear that?" "From a former colleague in the army. He still gets assignments at the palace now and then, and he picked up on some things." "Hm. That would explain a lot of what''s been happening here lately." "At least he inherited his father''s Nyd." "That''s something. Without our emperor''s power, our country would be helpless against the others." ,There''s a new emperor? Did he order the attack on my village?¡ä Anger slowly boiled up in Kawao. But suddenly there was a violent tremor that shook the entire pub. "What was that?" Kawao asked, surprised. "That must be the pirates! Don''t worry, this isn''t the first time they''ve attacked us." "But I''ve never felt anything like this before!" Kawao quickly stood up and ran out of the pub. "Hey, wait!" the bartender called after him, but Kawao had already gathered energy in his legs and was faster than ever. ,I barely know what''s going on here, but if this place is overrun by pirates, it''ll be harder for me to get off the island! I have to help these people!¡ä he decided.
14: Attack on Isulon Another tremor shook the harbor of Isulon. But Kawao was undeterred. He felt as if he knew where he needed to run. ,To the north of the city!¡ä he kept telling himself. Soon, he could see a large wall protecting the harbor to the north. Some people armed with bows were making their way to the top of the wall. "Hey, you! Stop right there!" someone suddenly shouted at him. He stopped abruptly. In front of him stood a short man in a fiery red uniform. Kawao recognized it immediately. It was the same uniform worn by the man who had commanded the attack on his village. "Who are you? Where did you get that uniform?" he asked angrily. But the man only replied, "That''s none of your damn business! Get lost! We don''t need civilians here!" "Hey, hey! I''m not a civilian! And stop ignoring my question!" "I don''t care who you are! We''re being attacked by pirates here! PIRATES! So leave us alone and let us do our job..." Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. Suddenly, a huge rock broke through the wall and buried Kawao and the man under the rubble. After a moment, Kawao freed himself with little effort. He shuddered. The part of the wall that had stood before him was now demolished. A rock had lodged in the house behind him, with blood dripping from its underside. Some of the soldiers lay unconscious or clearly dead on the ground. ,What happened to that guy from before?¡ä He searched through the rubble and quickly found him, also unconscious. He used this chance to examine the man''s uniform more closely. To his shock, he realized it was indeed the same as the one worn during the attack on his village. But before he could think further, loud laughter echoed through the hole in the wall. He carefully laid the man at the edge of the debris and made his way forward. He cautiously climbed through the hole, and just before he reached the other side, he saw it. A small army of pirates was storming the harbor from a nearby forest, being cut down piece by piece by the soldiers on the wall. It was a horrifying sight. It reminded him of what it must have been like when his village, his family, was subjected to such slaughter. Again, he heard the laughter echoing across the battlefield. On a small hill in the midst of the grassy, blood-soaked plain stood a man in a long green coat. He looked young. He must have been around Kawao''s age. The man took a deep breath and began to shout: "PEOPLE OF ISULON! THIS IS YOUR LAST CHANCE! SURRENDER OR WATCH YOUR CITY BURN!" ,Burn! He wants to burn the city! Just like mine!¡ä At these words, Kawao''s anger exploded. He quickly gathered more energy in his legs and, with breathtaking speed, leaped towards the man and punched him as hard as he could. Without hesitation, the man was hurled directly into one of the nearby trees, which fell upon impact. 15: Kawao vs. the Pirate鈥瞫 Leader Kawao landed clumsily on the small hill. Some of the pirates briefly turned to look at them, wondered for a moment, then continued running awkwardly. The man in green slowly stood up. "Ah! Uh! What the... Who are you?" he shouted at Kawao. "I am the one who will stop you!" Kawao replied. "Pah! Then try it!" He turned around and ran into the woods. For a moment, Kawao stood rooted to the spot. ,I''m not letting you get away, you filthy bastard!¡ä He followed him.
The forest was very dense, but that didn''t bother him. It reminded him of the jungle in his homeland. For a moment, he felt at home. Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author. But then a huge rock flew towards him. He barely managed to dodge it. While the rock tore through some of the trees behind him, he came to a stop in a small clearing. His opponent was waiting for him there. "Was that your ability?" "Maybe." His patience snapped again. Furious, Kawao charged at him. But his opponent just flicked something towards him. In the next moment, another huge rock flew at him. Instead of dodging, he gathered energy in his fist and shattered it. But his opponent was no longer there. He quickly looked around. Suddenly, another rock shot down at him from above. This time he dodged. But shortly afterward, more rocks flew at him. With the energy he had gathered, he could easily dodge them, but he was being bombarded. A short time later, the bombardment ended, and he could rest for a moment. Or so he thought. Because shortly afterward, massive leaves began to blow towards him. He tried to dodge again, but this time the wind thwarted his efforts. He got tangled in them and quickly lost his bearings. Another rock flew at him... and hit its target. The stranger, who had been hiding behind some trees at the edge of the clearing, stepped forward. "That¡¯s it, then." He turned around and started to leave. But suddenly he heard a faint crunching sound. "Not... yet!" Slowly, the rock lifted. With a mighty crash, it shattered into pieces. Kawao slowly emerged from the debris. "Where do you think you''re going?" His opponent looked at him in astonishment. "The party has just begun!" "You''re more stubborn than I thought!" "Thanks, likewise!" "Alright! How do you want to die?" he said, getting ready to fight. "Believe me. You don''t want to know!" 16: Bigger equals better? They looked deeply into each other¡¯s eyes. "Your ability is enlargement, isn''t it?" Kawao began. "And if it were?" "What then?" "Then you would be right! I can enlarge and enhance objects I touch many times over!" He picked up a small stone and tossed it aside. Shortly after, it grew rapidly to the size of a large boulder, breaking a tree upon landing. "But my Nyd doesn''t stop at objects. I can also enlarge smaller living creatures!" He searched for something on the ground. When he found it, he touched it, and soon he was standing on a giant ant. "Now I can control it too!" he said, pointing in Kawao''s direction. The ant attacked him. Kawao took a deep breath and gathered energy once again. To destroy the rock earlier, he had to expend all the energy he had gathered. With considerable effort, he dodged the ant''s attacks. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. Once he had enough energy, he jumped up and aimed for his actual opponent. But the man threw another stone at him, which immediately became a boulder. This time, however, Kawao didn¡¯t smash it. He twisted in the air and pushed off with his feet. The energy he had gathered was enough to propel him back toward his attacker. But the man released his Nyd from the ant, which instantly became smaller and thus brought him to safety. At least, that''s what he thought. After pushing off the boulder, Kawao twisted in the air again and continued to gather energy. He landed precisely on a tree, which he used to launch himself again, this time with such force that the trunk broke. As the ant shrank and his opponent correspondingly descended with it, Kawao rushed at him with breathtaking speed. When his opponent noticed him, it was already too late. With a punch that created a shockwave, he sent him flying against a tree. This time, however, he didn''t just hit it; he went right through it. After crashing through three trees, he landed on the ground, unconscious. Gasping for breath, Kawao slowly shuffled over to him. When he reached him, he checked his pulse. He was still alive. "You''re lucky this time!" He let himself fall against a nearby tree. ,What the hell is going on here?¡ä he wondered. ,First that nightmare church, then this attack... What''s next?¡ä Out of the corner of his eye, something glinted. He looked in that direction. Something bright was reflecting light. He slowly stood up again and limped forward. After pushing through some underbrush, he found his answer: ruins. Before him stretched an extensive ruin, almost completely reclaimed by nature. ,What have I discovered now?¡ä 17: Ruins of a Forgotten Time He had never seen anything like this before. The ruins looked like they were over a hundred years old. Slowly, he crept through them. The only sounds were those of the local wildlife. It was hard to distinguish what anything was supposed to be, yet somehow, this place felt familiar to him. As if he had been here before. A loud, booming rattle echoed through the ruins, startling a few birds. ,What was that?¡ä he wondered, and started searching for the source of the noise. After a short while, he saw some cables on the ground, leading out of the ruins. He followed them. The cables were quite thick, almost like tree roots. This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. A little later, he reached an entrance at a hill that led into the ground. ,Did that noise come from here?¡ä He got his answer from an even more tremendous roar, making him cover his ears. ,I must be pretty far from the harbor if no one else hears this.¡ä After a brief hesitation, he opened the metal door and stepped inside. In front of him lay a long, dark corridor. As he felt his way along the wall, he accidentally hit a switch. Suddenly, the lights in the corridor turned on. In the distance, he could see another door. What puzzled him most was how the lights suddenly came on in the tunnel. How was that possible? For now, he continued onward. He tried to open the door, but it was locked. Or was it just stuck? He gathered some energy and pulled the door open with a loud crash. Apparently, it had been locked because he had ripped it off its hinges. In front of him lay a larger room with many tables covered in strange apparatuses. He couldn''t identify any of the devices, but by now, he was almost used to seeing and experiencing things he couldn''t explain. Then he suddenly noticed a man on the other side of the room. The man had been staring at him the whole time. For a moment, both were silent. Then Kawao noticed the man''s coat. It was the same as the one worn by the pirate leader he had just defeated! "Who are you?" Kawao asked seriously. "I''d like to know that as well," the man replied. 18: Doorbreaker Suddenly, the man stretched out his hand and shot a fireball in his direction. Kawao barely managed to dodge it. But as he was about to counterattack, his opponent fled through a side door, which he immediately locked. "Good luck getting through here! Even a cannon couldn''t break this door down!" he called back and ran off. ,Who the hell was that?¡ä Kawao wondered. ,It''s clear that he''s in cahoots with the pirate leader. So, no matter what he''s planning, I have to stop him!¡ä He sprinted to the door and tried to push it open. It didn''t budge. The man was right. It was very strong! He gathered more strength and pushed harder. But nothing moved. Then he stepped back a few paces. "If the door can''t be broken down by a cannon..." This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report. He took a deep breath. "Then I just need to break it down with more force than a cannon!" He concentrated and gathered as much strength as possible. If he attacked now, he wouldn''t be able to move as well afterward. But he had been recovering faster than usual lately. On his way here, he had regained feeling in his arms and legs! He charged forward. With a tremendous crash, he struck the door, which finally flew off its hinges. Shortly afterward, he clutched his fist. "OW! That hurts!" he complained before following the corridor behind the door. He was exhausted again. ,Hopefully, I have enough strength left to defeat him!¡ä At the end of the corridor was another door, but this one was open. He stepped through and was shocked by what he saw. In front of him, in a large hall, was a huge vehicle. It moved on two tracks and had a large, long cannon barrel from which it could fire. A tank stood before him. He had never seen anything like it before. Suddenly, he heard voices. "Hey! How much longer? Is the tank ready?" called the man who had just fled from him. "Yeah, yeah. Almost! Why are you in such a hurry?" answered someone he couldn''t see. "Because someone from the Kasakan army is already here!" "What, already? Are you sure you''re not hallucinating?" "Of course not! I locked him in the research lab. But we should still hurry!" "Is that him?" "Huh?" He turned around and paled. "How did you get through the door?" 19: The True Masterminds Kawao looked into the eyes of the man who had dared to shoot a fireball at him. "Who are you?" he asked again, determined. "Are you deaf, boy? I ASKED YOU A QUESTION FIRST! So stop answering me with another question!" the stranger shouted back. "I don''t care if I answer you with a question or not! All day, since I got to this island, weird things have been happening, and I don''t even know who I''m fighting or who is fighting me! I thought I was fighting pirates, but now I see you with this ''thing'' in front of me, and I have absolutely no idea what''s going on here! So please! Can you at least tell me who you are before this whole story develops further?" He was pretty out of breath. But he had to say it. He had never been this confused in his life. For a moment, everyone was silent. "Hah! Fine. Alright! I''ll tell you who we are!" the stranger replied. This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. "My name is Kuro, and I''m a mercenary. My brother Koru and I are supporting the pirates here on Isulon to take control of the entire island and make a good life for ourselves! The guy behind me in the tank is the leader of the pirates, Paron. Together, we will use this tank to take over the southern harbor and bring this island under our control!" "Hey! Don''t just tell him everything!" "Don''t worry! He''s going to die anyway!" ,So the one I just fought wasn''t their leader, but his brother?¡ä "By the way, what happened to my pathetic little brother? He and the rest of our cannon fodder were supposed to keep the soldiers busy while we got the tank up and running." "Your brother is unconscious nearby! I defeated him!" "Pah. The bastard was useless anyway! He couldn''t even stop a weak Nyd user!" Kawao seethed with anger. "Family is not pathetic! And you want to kill everyone living here just to have a good life? You make me sick! I''d rather vomit if I weren''t so deeply angry," he said slowly. Suddenly, he gathered massive amounts of energy. "You are the lowest scum! And you don''t deserve to live because you''ll never understand the value of life! No matter how much revenge consumes me, as long as I can wipe out trash like you, it''s worth it!" He prepared to jump. "Die!" He leapt towards Kuro. 20: Kawao vs. Tank With insane speed, he rushed toward Kuro. But Kuro managed to turn his head to the side just in time. Kawao''s fist crashed against the metal hull of the tank, leaving a deep dent... and trapping his fist. Kuro took advantage of this brief moment to climb onto the tank and enter through a hatch on top. While Kawao tried to free his hand, the tank roared to life. With a loud clattering, it began to move. Kawao jumped up and clung to the side to avoid being run over by the tracks. The tank slowly steered toward a wall, trying to crush him against it! He concentrated and gathered more energy. Just before they reached the wall, he freed himself and quickly climbed to the other side. Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on. The monstrous vehicle screeched as it scraped along the wall, giving its paint a new "polish." ,I have to stop them somehow!¡ä He climbed around the tank, trying to find a weak spot. ,There must be a vulnerable point somewhere!¡ä Suddenly, a small hatch on the side opened. He wanted to punch into it immediately, but instead, a fireball shot out, knocking him off the tank. He hit the ground hard but quickly got back up, ready to attack again. Before he could react, the tank was already bearing down on him. At the last moment, he managed to dodge! ,If that thing hits me, I''m done for!¡ä The tank slowly turned around again. ,How can I take this thing apart? It has no weak points!¡ä Now he stood directly in front of the tank. The barrel aimed straight at him. For a moment, neither moved. Then Kawao took the first step. "So what now? Are you going to shoot me?" he shouted at them. There were some clattering sounds. BOOM! Suddenly, a fist-sized fireball shot out of the barrel at immense speed. He tried to dodge, but just before it reached him, the ball suddenly began to grow. When the ball hit Kawao, it was already too late. It had grown larger than he was in a split second. With tremendous force, the ball exploded, sending him flying. He crashed through a wall and found himself back outside in the forest. He hit the ground hard and rolled several meters before coming to a stop. "What... what was that?" he gasped, before hearing the faint clattering of the slowly approaching behemoth once again. 21: The Truth is ... Hesitantly, he tried to get up again. ,How am I supposed to defeat that thing?¡ä, he wondered. ,I don''t know, but I have to try! Everyone in the harbor is counting on me! If I don''t stop them now, everyone else will die!¡ä "Do you need help?" he suddenly heard a voice behind him. He turned around. It was Koru! The younger brother of Kuro! Reflexively, Kawao rolled to the side and got shakily to his feet, even though he was still kneeling. "What do you want? Haven''t you had enough?" he asked. Koru hesitated for a moment. Then he said, "I want to help you stop my brother!" Kawao watched him calmly. "Why? Your brother is insane! How do I know you''re not just like him? How do I know you won''t stab me in the back at the first opportunity?" This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there. "Well... I don''t have a knife." "..." "But you''re right! My brother is insane. He''s always been that way. Since the death of our parents, he''s oppressed me and treated me like a useless slave, which I guess I am." Kawao listened while the rattling of the tank grew louder. "I was never as strong-willed as he was. I never dared to stand up to him." The tank now drove out of the hall by simply crashing through its wall. "But when I fought you earlier and lost, I... I... For the first time in my life, I felt that someone could stand up to him. You were so angry when I threatened to burn down the harbor. Slowly, I realized that you could put an end to my megalomaniac brother and his plan. So, I''m asking you: Let me fight by your side so I can step out of my brother''s shadow! I don''t want to be weak anymore and just say yes to everything. I want to be strong!" Kawao hesitated for a brief moment, then slowly walked over to him and put a hand on his shoulder. "You don''t need to ask to fight by my side." Koru looked up at him. "Alone, I probably wouldn''t stand a chance against the two of them. Besides, I no longer feel like you''re my enemy." He turned toward the tank, which was now almost upon them. "Actually, you seem like a really nice guy. I must have misjudged you! If we get through this, I''d like to get to know you better!" Koru looked at him hopefully. "Sure! Let''s hang out after this! But first... let''s teach my unruly brother a lesson!" For some reason, Kawao knew immediately that if they survived this, they would become good friends. 22: Together Against the Impossible The tank came to a stop a few meters in front of them. Shortly afterward, a voice emanated from it. It was Kuro. "What''s wrong, brother? Why are you siding with him?" "I don''t want to stand in your shadow anymore. I can take care of myself! I can manage just fine without you!" "You can''t do shit without me! You''re nothing without me! If it weren''t for me, we would have been executed back then! And now you''re just turning against me... after I SAVED YOUR LIFE? Pah! I should have left you behind back then!" These words reignited Kawao''s anger. "You filthy bastard!" he shouted. "How can you say that to your brother, your family, and not be ashamed!" "Family? That scum never belonged to my family! My family died years ago!" "You''re the scum, brother! Give up!" "I''ll pulverize both of you first! Die!" With a bang, another fireball shot out of the barrel. But this time, Kawao managed to dodge in time. If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. He quickly looked around for Koru. Apparently, he had dodged it too. There was no time to worry about their weaknesses. He just had to try something. Suddenly, he charged at the tank and jumped onto it. He looked around. ,What can I do? Ah!¡ä He climbed to the barrel and tried to bend it. He gathered more and more strength, but it didn''t budge. Suddenly, the upper part of the tank started to rotate. He tried to hold on to the barrel. But shortly afterward, he lost his grip and flew off at great speed. As Kawao crashed through a tree, Koru faced the tank. He placed his hands on the ground and concentrated. Suddenly, the earth under the tank rose, lifting it onto a hill. "I just need to flip this thing over! Then you can''t get out and can''t keep moving!" he shouted. But shortly afterward, the hill started to shrink again. The tank quickly returned to level ground. "You stupid little brother! Did you forget my ability? You can make things big, and I make them small again!" "But how? You''re not even touching the ground!" "My Nyd is stronger than yours!" BOOM! Koru was hit by a fireball and flew several meters before landing motionless on the ground. Shortly afterward, Kawao came rushing in to attack again. But the barrel quickly turned in his direction and fired at him. This time, however, he didn''t dodge. Instead, he struck the incoming projectile with full force. With a bang, it shattered, and Kawao stood there unscathed. "Is that all you''ve got..." BOOM! Another projectile. Again, he deflected it. Immediately after, another followed. And another. Until he was under continuous fire. He deflected one after another. But he quickly ran out of energy and was repeatedly hit. Defeated, he fell to the ground, and the tank began its path to the southern harbor of Isulon. 23: A New Plan Only when the rattling of the tank stopped did they move. Hesitant and coughing, they tried to get up, but it took a few minutes before they could stand on their feet again. "Hah hah hah! DAMN! Koru! Are you alright?" "I could ask you the same question. Hah hah. You took more hits than I did!" "I''ll manage! I was able to protect myself a bit with energy!" "So that''s your Nyd?" "Didn''t you notice it during our fight?" "Maybe. I had a suspicion, but I didn''t expect it to be true! If I may ask... what is your Nyd source?" "Nyd source? What is that supposed to be? Ah! Do you mean my Nyd object?" "You can call it that, yes!" "Honestly, I don''t know!" "What do you mean you don''t know?" "I''ve only had my Nyd for about a week. And I only recently learned about this ''source''." Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. "Strange." "Why, what''s the matter?" "Usually, it''s known from birth whether a child can be a Nyd user or not. You''re the first case I''ve heard of who didn''t know from birth!" Both were silent for a moment. "We don''t have time for this!" Kawao then said. "We need to figure out a way to destroy that thing." They thought for a moment. Then both had an idea. "I know what! How about..." they both shouted at the same time. They looked at each other and laughed briefly. Then they quickly discussed their ideas. "Yeah, that could really work! Should we try it?" Koru asked. "We don''t have time! We have to follow them and try it in the heat of the moment!" "And if it doesn''t work?" "Then we improvise!" They nodded to each other and set off.
"Hey, Koru." "Yes?" "What is your Nyd source?" "Why do you ask?" "You just asked me. And of all the people with strange powers, I haven''t seen any of these sources!" "That''s because in a fight, it can be crucial if you know the enemy''s weakness!" "That makes sense!" "My source is my left earring!" he said, pointing to his left ear, where a small bronze ring hung. "If someone breaks that, you can''t use your powers anymore?" "Exactly! My brother''s source is also an earring. His is silver, and he always wears it on his right ear." ,Now that he mentions it, Kuro did have a silver earring. Hard to believe that''s really the source of so much power!¡ä "But it probably won''t help us much," Koru continued. "As long as he doesn''t come out of the tank, we can''t fight him." "But now I know it! And that''s already a big advantage!" Koru smiled briefly. They heard the rattling of the tank approaching. They were almost there. 24: Battle of the Giants Through the trees, they could already see it. With brute force, it carved a path through the forest. They ignored the smaller trees and simply drove over them or shot them to pieces. "It''s time!" Kawao shouted to Koru. "Do it!" Koru ran to him and placed his hand on Kawao''s shoulder. "Do you really want to try this?" "We don''t have time! Go!" Suddenly, a new strength surged through Kawao. It spread from the spot where Koru touched him throughout his entire body. Their opponents seemed to have noticed them, as they began to aim at them. "So you really want to try again? This time we won''t be merciful!" Kuro shouted. Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators! They fired. And hit. With a tremendous explosion, they turned to ash. Or so they thought. As the smoke cleared, a figure gradually rose, growing larger and larger. By the time the smoke had fully dispersed, they could see what had happened. Kawao had deflected the shot. Koru had used his power to make Kawao many times larger. With his increased size, Kawao could now absorb significantly more energy. To him, the tank now looked like a toy. Smiling, he looked down at them. "Who has the upper hand now?" Suddenly, he kicked with full force, sending the tank flying hundreds of meters away. "Koru! Stay here! I''ll take care of them!" "Alright! I''ve never tried enlarging a human before! I can''t keep you like this for long!" "Good! Because I can''t fight like this for long," he replied and ran after the tank. With each of his steps, the ground shook.
Unfortunately, the tank had landed back on its tracks. But it was now significantly more dented. ,Just a few more hits and we''ve got it!¡ä, he thought. But suddenly, they fired at him again. ,With my current amount of energy, it shouldn''t bother me if they shoot at me!¡ä But he was wrong. The shot hit him in the foot, causing him to stumble. He tried to stop himself, but he was already falling. Desperately, he tried to catch himself with his hands, but it was too late. With a tremendous crash, he slammed face-first into the tank. The impact was so great that it even caused a small shockwave. Shortly afterward, Kawao began to slowly shrink back to his normal size. 25: Failure! Kawao lay motionless on the ground. As he grew smaller and smaller, a crater where the tank had been became visible. When he was small enough, the tank started moving again, managing to free itself from his ever-shrinking face. It turned onto its back, revealing the full extent of the fall''s impact. A large, bloody scar marked his face, one that would probably be permanent if he survived. The tank was now heavily damaged. It could still move, but it was clear it wouldn''t last much longer. "Crazy fool!" Kuro said. "That''s what he gets for trying to play the hero here!" "What about your brother?" The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. "Leave him! He''s probably scared out of his wits anyway. And even if he''s not, he won''t be a threat to us. We should keep moving! If we sustain any more serious damage, our easy conquest will be over." They drove off. When they were out of sight, Kawao returned to his normal size. Koru cautiously crawled out from a nearby bush. He approached Kawao and was shocked when he saw his face. "Oh my God!" he stuttered and checked to see if he was still alive. For a moment, he feared Kawao was dead, but then... A pulse! He was still alive! "Thank goodness! Kawao! Can you hear me?" Slowly, Kawao turned his head towards Koru. Every tiny movement caused him immense pain, and he had to muster all his strength to stay conscious. He tried to speak, but not a single word came out of his mouth. "Don''t worry! You''ll be okay! I promise you! I owe you so much. I won''t let you die here like this!" He looked in the direction the tank had gone. "I have to stop them! As long as they haven''t been stopped, I can''t bring you to the harbor! ... Wait a moment! I''ll take care of them quickly! Then I''ll come back and take care of you, understood?" He looked back at Kawao. He looked deep into his eyes. His fighting spirit was unbroken. Koru stood up and ran after the tank while Kawao slowly lost consciousness. He tried to stay awake, but shortly after, everything went black. 26: What do you want? He suddenly opened his eyes. He floated in an endless void. ,Am I dead?¡ä, he wondered. After what felt like an eternity, a bright, high-pitched voice answered him. "What is it that you desire? Life or revenge?" "I need one for the other. So, I would say: life!" "Really? If it''s really about life, why do you risk yours so often?" "I''m not doing that!" "But you are! You just haven''t realized it yet." "Excuse me?" "When your village burned down, you could have fled. You knew the culprits were still there. You saw their ship on the coast out of the corner of your eye, but you chose to ignore it." If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement. "Wait! How do you..." "And when you followed the nun. You sensed that something was off. Yet you followed her and put your life in danger." "How can you..." "And when you fought Koru at the harbor wall, you didn''t have to pursue him. You could have returned to safety. And you knew that!" After this speech, the voice fell silent. "How is it that you know all this?" he asked after a while. "I am you. And you are me. Our fates are intertwined. But that doesn''t matter now. What is it that you desire? Life or revenge?" she asked again. ,How can she know this? What did she mean by our fates being intertwined? Who is she?... No! That''s not important now!... She''s right! It''s not about my own survival. If it were, I wouldn''t have embarked on this journey... What I truly want... Why I did all this is...¡ä He looked up. "REVENGE!" he said with a tortured, hate-filled expression. "I can see that this is truly your answer! Very well! You shall have another chance! But know that this is an exception! You will not get another!" Suddenly, he felt better. As if he had been awakened with a bucket of ice-cold water. "I hope you get your revenge, but please! Take care of your body! If it''s destroyed, even I can''t help you!" "Wait! Who are you?" he called to the voice. But just as she was about to answer, he woke up. He looked around. He lay where he had fought the tank as a giant. All his pain was gone. He touched his forehead. The bleeding had stopped! With a grim smile, he stood up. He could continue fighting! 27: Finale He ran in the direction the tank had gone. He could easily follow their tracks from the tank¡¯s treads. Soon he heard the sounds of battle, and through the underbrush, he could see the wall of the harbor. Suddenly, he broke through the last bushes and stood at the edge of the grassy plain where he had briefly fought Koru before. Now, however, the tank was right in front of the wall, preparing to shoot another hole into it. Koru was standing directly in front of them, barely able to stay on his feet. Just before the tank fired, Koru created a hill under it, lifting the tank so that the shot missed the wall and the harbor. Kuro then made the hill disappear, and Koru collapsed to the ground. "Looks like you''re finally at your end! But just to make sure," Kuro shouted, aiming the tank at his brother. The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. "This is it then... ''Brother''." BOOM! He missed Koru. Kawao had just managed to push him out of the line of fire and deflect the shot. "Kawao? How is this possible? You were..." Koru began. "Yeah, I know! It''s not important now. I have one last idea!" "Hm?" "Can you amplify the energy I absorb with my Nyd?" "... I don''t know!" "Let''s try it! This is our very last chance! If we fail now, it¡¯s all over!" "... Okay! Let''s do it!" Kawao took a deep breath and began to gather energy. He concentrated it entirely into his right fist. He charged at the tank, which was aiming at them again. But instead of dodging, he held his fist into the barrel. "NOW!" he shouted, and suddenly, he felt an immense amount of energy surge into his fist. It felt like it was going to tear him apart, and he knew he couldn¡¯t hold it for long. Then the tank fired. The moment the shot hit Kawao''s fist, he released all the energy at once. A massive explosion shook the harbor of Isulon. Kawao was thrown against the wall with great force, rendering him unconscious instantly. ,Did we do it? If I wake up, I¡¯ll know.¡ä Then he blacked out.
"Sigh. And I just told him to take better care of his body... What a great host I''ve chosen!" 28: Awakening Slowly, he regained consciousness. He was lying in a bed in a house at the harbor. Nearby, he could hear people cheering and celebrating. Was he in the inn? Had he made it? Did they win? Suddenly, a door opened. Koru came in. He was quite well bandaged. "Ah, you''re awake! We almost feared you wouldn''t make it!" he said as he walked to the bed. "Really? You didn''t need to worry about that... Anyway, what happened? Did we win? What happened to your brother and the pirates?" Koru was silent for a moment. He slowly sat down on a chair next to the bed. If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it. "We won! Your final attack caused the tank to explode from the inside. After that, the remaining pirates fled." "And your brother?" "He didn''t make it. Neither did Paron. After the fire was extinguished, we found their remains in the wreckage." Both were silent for a moment. "I''m sorry," Kawao said. "For what?" "For killing your brother. He was a psychopath, but he was still your brother, your family. If you wanted to hit me or kill me, I would understand." Koru sighed. "If we hadn''t met today, I would indeed be very angry with you. That''s true! But even now, I''m not really happy about it. I just can''t be... My brother was a monster. And maybe he really deserved to die. I truly believe that. But still... Even if he didn''t see me as part of his family, he was still part of mine. And it''s always hard to lose someone you once loved, no matter what mistakes they made in their life. That bond between us will always remain. So I can never truly forgive you, no matter how much I want to. It should be me apologizing, not you." Both were silent. "What will you do now?" Kawao asked. "I..." he began, but suddenly the door was kicked open, and John stumbled into the small room. He was quite drunk. "Why, Kawao? Why?" he slurred. "Why did you lie to me?" 29: Aftershocks "John? What do you mean? Is everything alright?" Kawao asked, confused. "You lied to me!" he slurred, stumbling towards the bed. "You promised me... hic... that you wouldn''t tangle with the pirates!... And you broke that promise! You broke it!" "I know! I''m really sorry. But I had no other choice! If I hadn''t fought them, then now..." "Stop making excuses! To me or to yourself. You knew you could have avoided it. But you did it anyway. You abused my trust!" "So you would have preferred if the harbor was destroyed because I did nothing?" "Yes! Because then you wouldn''t have broken your promise!" For a moment, there was silence. Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work! "You''ve clearly had too much to drink, John!" Koru interjected, starting to guide the captain out. "We''re not done, Kawao! When I''m sober, you''ll hear from me!" John called out before the door closed, leaving Kawao alone in the room again. ,So we really did it! What a relief!... I never thought there would be so much to experience outside my island... But whatever happens in the future: I will get my revenge!¡ä Shortly after, he fell asleep, eager to heal his wounds and continue his journey.
Meanwhile, on the other side of the island in the "Free City" of the pirates: In a larger room of an inn where the pirate captain lived, his deputy and several other men were discussing their next steps. "What do we do now?" "If the people from the harbor report this to the army, we''re finished!" They were uneasy, muttering fearfully to themselves. "QUIET!" the deputy shouted, slamming a knife into a nearby wall. "We don''t need to worry! Even if they contact the army, we still have enough time to get out of here! We should start preparing. Let the others know!" The others nodded hesitantly and then left.
While the pirates were preparing to flee, rumors began to slowly spread elsewhere, infecting a large city with possible falsehoods. This was the beginning of a hunt that would spread across the entire land, targeting only one person: Kawao. 30: Memories Kawao woke up in the same room where he had woken up the day before. It was a room in the inn, as Koru had told him later that evening. And because he had saved the harbor from destruction, he was allowed to stay there as long as he wanted. He responded by saying he was looking for a way to get to the mainland. That''s when he learned that in two days, a ship from the Kasakan army would be arriving to check on things for the first time in a long while. He could ask them if they would take him along. And so it was settled. He got up carefully. His injuries were healing at an incredibly fast pace. Koru mentioned that this was due to the Nyd. Nyd users have stronger regenerative powers than people without Nyd. This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. He could already walk again, but he probably wouldn''t be fully fit until the next day. Suddenly, there was a knock at the door. "Kawao? Are you awake?" It was Koru. "Yeah. What''s up?" "I''m going down for breakfast. Want to join?" "Sure. Go ahead. I''ll be right down." He heard Koru walk away slowly. As he had suspected, he got along well with him. They had talked late into the evening. They quickly found a connection with each other. He knew he could rely on him when it mattered. He quickly got dressed and went downstairs.
Downstairs was a small hall with many tables and chairs. From somewhere, he could smell a deliciously tempting aroma. The hall reminded him of the gathering place in his village. They called it "Git-How," which meant "good coming together." Whenever the village gathered there, there was a big feast. Whether it was for those who passed the hunter''s test or for making it through a hard winter, there was always a wonderful atmosphere, and everyone was happy and content. He missed those moments. "Ah, there you are!" Koru called to him, waving him over. At the table, there were many different dishes he had never seen before in his life. But their sight made his mouth watery. 31: A historical Meal He sat down across from Koru at the table. Eagerly, he looked at the many dishes laid out before him. "Dig in! Take whatever you want! The owner said we can have whatever we want." Slowly, Kawao reached out his hand, contemplating where to start. "So many things I''ve never seen or smelled before!" he said, swallowing hard. Koru couldn''t believe his ears. "What?" "I mean, I''ve never seen or tasted any of these delicious-looking dishes in my life." "I can''t believe that. Have you been living under a rock or something?" He quickly pulled his hand back. "What do you mean? I''ve lived my entire life on an island far from any civilization." A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. "WHAT?!? And now you''re setting out to learn more about life beyond your horizon?" Koru exclaimed in disbelief. ,Where did he get that idea? Never mind. It''s probably better than telling him I''m out for revenge.¡ä "Something like that," he replied. Koru covered his face with his hand and took a deep breath. "Wow. Just wow... Alright! Then I''ll make it my mission to teach you about the impressive culinary history of Unas and its countries." Kawao nodded hesitantly. Koru then began to explain that, during the 3 Wars of the Lost, people and countries grew further apart. It was only with the end of the last war and the ensuing peace agreement that the countries began to slowly but surely open up. And with that, various dishes gradually reached the previously inaccessible countries of the continent. For Koru and many others who grew up just before the end of the war, it was something like a "Culinary Revolution." That¡¯s why he was so excited to introduce Kawao to this world. In the following hours, Kawao enjoyed many well-known dishes, such as braised flame pork in spicy BBQ sauce, whose meat is naturally almost fully cooked; the silvered lobster, under whose metallic shell a super juicy piece of meat waits to melt in your mouth with a b¨¦chamel sauce; the decade egg, which is only ready for preparation after at least 10 years and, when cooked, can keep you full for 3 days; or the infinite cream puff, said to contain a scent so sweet that it makes you cry. For a moment, this experience reminded him of Git-How and his family. Tears welled up in his eyes. 32: Nyd-Level Part 1 After a few hours of eating, they took a moment to rest. "I''ve never eaten anything so good in my life!" Kawao said, burping heartily. "See? I told you! And that was just the beginning! You absolutely have to go to Kaisan sometime. They have the largest selection of grilled dishes." "Kaisan? What''s that?" "It''s the capital of Kasaka. It''s far in the north of the country. But if you don''t have a next destination yet, you should go there." ''The capital, huh? Maybe I''ll find more information there... The people guarding this place. That one guy had the same uniform as those who attacked my village.'' "Shall we stretch our legs a bit? We can get our Nyd-level measured!" "Nyd... level?" "Oh right, the Nyd-level is a value that measures the strength of a Nyd. The higher the value, the stronger you are supposed to be." "Supposed to be?" If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. "Yeah. The value consists of a measure of physical strength and a value for the usefulness of the Nyd in combat. So, a person''s Nyd level can be high even if they''re weak or very slow even if they''re strong and experienced in combat." ''I see. So I can get an idea of my approximate strength.'' "Shall we?" Koru asked, groaning as he stood up. "We can burn off some calories while we''re at it!"
After a short time, they reached the wall. Right where the hole was, where Kawao had chased Koru. Citizens and soldiers were working hard to repair the wall. As they walked past, someone suddenly shouted at them from behind. "HEY, YOU THERE! WHAT ARE YOU DOING HERE!" They turned around abruptly. The man Kawao had pulled from the rubble stood before them. "Oh, it''s you! Sorry for yelling. Things are pretty chaotic here. What do you want?" "We want to get our Nyd levels measured." "Hmm... We might have an old device in storage. Follow me." They followed him silently. He led them to a small house built right against the wall, which luckily remained undamaged during the attack. "It should be in there. I can''t promise it still works, though." "Either way, thanks for letting us use it." "Oh, it''s the least I can do for you... Oh yeah. Kawao!" "Hm? How do you know my name?" "Everyone here knows it since you saved us. By the way, my name is Kinto. I wanted to apologize. I yelled at you back then without reason, even though you had good intentions. I''m really sorry." "Oh, no need for that! We were all pretty tense in that situation." "That shouldn''t be an excuse for me... I owe you my life. I won''t forget that!" The lock on the door clicked and opened with a loud creak. 33: Nyd-Level Part 2 In the storage room, many dusty crates were scattered around. At the other end of the room stood a large object covered by a cloth. "That must be it!" Kinto said. He pulled off the cloth, and after the resulting cloud of dust settled, they could see the Nyd meter. It was a large box with a display panel on top. The box had two holes where one could insert their arms. Kinto gave the machine a solid kick, and it hummed to life. "Who wants to go first?" "I will," Koru replied, stepping forward. He placed his arms into the holes, and after a brief loud rumble, the panel displayed a glowing number. "10,540!" "Is that good?" You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version. "Better than my brother! He had 10,136... It makes me happy that at least in terms of numbers, I''m stronger than him... Now it''s your turn. I''m curious!" Hesitantly, Kawao approached the machine and also inserted his arms into the machine. It felt pleasantly warm. After another rumble, his Nyd level appeared glowing on the display panel. "18,450!" "Wow! That''s really impressive! That makes you stronger than some commanders!" "Commanders?" "From the Kasaka army! Your rank is determined by your Nyd level. To become a commander, you must have a Nyd level of at least 10,000! From there, you can determine their strength based on their unit number. The smaller the unit number, the stronger the commanding officer." "Ugh! Sounds like it''s not easy." "It''s not. Even though there are quite a few commanders, it''s still an achievement to reach a higher level than them.... What do you think, Kinto? What rank would he be?" "Hmm. Hard to say. I haven''t had contact with the military of this country for a while. But I guess with your skills... you could be at least the commander of the 17th unit?" "That doesn''t sound very strong... So there are 17 commanders?" "No, no. Let me think.... If nothing has changed, there are currently 20 commanders in the Kasaka army!" "Isn''t one of them coming here to check on things?" "Yes, that''s right. That''s the one you need to ask to take you with him, Kawao!" "What rank does he have?" "He''s the commander of the 15th unit! They call him the ''Ship Climber,'' Paikon!" 34: The Church of Madness Kawao and Koru were on their way back to the inn. They took a small detour to take another look at the harbor. It was a nice little place. The people were friendly, and it seemed like there were no bigger worries in the world than pirates. That made him wonder even more why, when he first entered the place, everything seemed so gloomy and sickly. "What''s wrong?" Koru asked him. "You seem deep in thought." "I''m just thinking about how the harbor was when I first arrived." "Was anything different?" "Yeah, pretty much everything. There was thick fog everywhere, and there were hardly any people on the streets. Those who were out seemed sick and deformed. They avoided me when they saw me, as if I were some kind of monster. And then there was that nun... and the church." Stolen story; please report. "Church? Nun? What are you talking about?" "Hm?" "There is no church in this harbor." "What?" "Where was it supposed to be?" "Come, I''ll show you!" They hurried off.
When they finally stopped, Kawao was surprised. Where the old rundown church was supposed to be, there were now some abandoned houses. "I don''t understand! It was right here!" "I thought about what you told me on our way here. You might have had an encounter with the ''Church of Madness''!" "Who or what is that?" "It''s a group of religious fanatics. For a long time, they were thought to be just crazy, but recently, strange things have been happening around them!" "What kind of things?" "People start seeing things or hearing creepy voices. No one is really sure what they''re up to or what exactly they do!" "... Have you ever dealt with them?" Koru hesitated for a moment. "Yes... I have." "You don''t have to tell me if you don''t want to." "Thanks. I don''t want to unless it''s necessary... This cult is not normal. I hope you stay away from them in the future... Nothing good comes from being involved with them!" They looked at the empty houses for a moment. Then, feeling uneasy, they went back to the inn, unaware that someone in one of the houses was watching them. 35: The Emperors Choice The next morning. It was the last full day Kawao would spend on Isulon. Since the first rays of sunlight had streamed through the window of his room, he had been training. ,The fight against that tank nearly killed me! I must become stronger if I want to exact my revenge!¡ä The previous evening, he had spoken with Kinto. He wanted to know more about the uniform Kinto wore, as it looked identical to the uniforms of the people who had plundered his homeland. Kinto told him that it was the standard uniform for soldiers of the Kasakan army. This confirmed for Kawao that someone high-ranking in the military must have been responsible for the attack. At least now he was one step closer on his path of revenge. And he was on the right path. If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. Although he didn''t know exactly where he was headed once he reached the mainland, he was confident he would find his way!
Meanwhile, in Kaisan, the capital of Kasaka: A great commotion had recently arisen in the emperor''s palace. The rumors about Kawao, which had been circulating in the city for just two days, had finally reached the palace.
In the Emperor''s throne room: "Your Majesty! Have you heard the rumors?" a servant asked the emperor. The emperor sat quietly and thoughtfully on his throne. His many splendid robes nearly obscured his entire figure. Wearily, he looked at the servant to his left, who had posed the question. "No... I don''t believe I have. What rumors do you speak of?" "Well. There is a rumor spreading through the city that an unknown mercenary has supposedly sunk one of your scout ships in the southern seas. It is said that he has declared the area his territory and destroys anyone and anything that dares to sail there." "Interesting! That might explain why we haven''t received any news from that area for about a week!" "What do you intend to do, my lord?" "I had planned to wait a few more days before worrying, but now that I''ve heard these rumors... I think we don''t need to worry for the time being!" "If I may ask, my lord. What makes you so sure?" "Paikon is currently on his way to the southern seas to check on the situation. If there''s any crazy mercenary who thinks he can claim territory, he''ll deal with him!" And thus, the emperor heard of Kawao for the first time. Even if it was only through rumors 36: Commander of the 15th Unit, Paikon The sun was at its zenith as the pirates of Isulon made their final preparations for departure. From the balcony of his room, the former vice-captain coordinated the last preparations. "That should be everything! Just in time¡­" He froze. From his balcony, he had a clear view of the sea off Isulon. But instead of a clear horizon, he saw a ship approaching the island. Even though it was too far away to identify who it was, he immediately knew it was the Kasaka army, whose sole objective would be to wipe them out completely. "WE HAVE NO MORE TIME! THEY ARE HERE!" he shouted to the remaining pirates, and panic immediately broke out. He looked again in the direction of the ship. Something was different. A red dot was slowly approaching the island. ,That''s not a dot!¡ä It was a rope made of pure flames, stretching from the ship all the way to the edge of his balcony. Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.
Meanwhile, on the army''s ship: "Are you sure, sir?" "Yes, yes. I am! And now don''t bother me further. After a long time, I can finally have some fun again!" ''How can one have fun with this?'' wondered the soldier who was speaking to Commander Paikon. Paikon was as large as a gorilla, and many would say just as dumb. In one hand, he held a handle, from one end of which the long flame rope began. With one final gesture, he bid farewell to his men before reeling in the rope at an overwhelming speed, propelling himself like a cannonball into the pirate captain''s room. The captain barely managed to dodge but was buried under the rubble, under which the commander slowly rose, smiling at him with eager anticipation. "So, how do you want to die?"
The massacre only ended when the moon bathed the completely shattered harbor in its pale light. The bodies of the pirates were scattered everywhere, greeting the arriving soldiers with their distorted faces. The sole survivor was the captain. Somehow, he had managed to escape and was now whimpering in the corner of his barely recognizable room. He heard loud creaking footsteps slowly approaching him. Something grabbed his head and effortlessly lifted him up. It was the commander. Holding him with just one hand, he asked, "Any last words?" But as the moonlight began to reveal the commander''s form, the captain couldn''t utter a single word. Paikon was drenched in the blood of his crew, his comrades. Aside from the blood, however, his uniform was completely unscathed. As was he. No one had managed to leave even a scratch on him. "None, huh? Well then! Nothing personal, kid!" Suddenly, a flame rope shot out from the hand holding him, burning through his skull and then the rest of his body. In the end, Paikon held nothing in his outstretched hand. He sighed in disappointment and looked up at the moon. "So, he wasn''t the one who destroyed our ship!" 37: Gratitude Kawao woke up peacefully the next morning, unaware of what had transpired on the other side of the island during the night. As he dressed, he pondered what Paikon might be like. He hadn''t had any real contact with the Kasakan army yet, but he knew he couldn''t reveal his true intentions to them. Some high-ranking official had ordered the attack on his homeland. Maybe it was Paikon. He was the commander of the 15th unit. Paikon was supposed to arrive around noon to check on the situation. During this time, Kawao planned to ask him for passage to the mainland. He also knew Paikon was supposed to be stronger than he was. ,I shouldn''t confront him hastily,¡ä he decided. If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. The most important thing for now was getting to the mainland without trouble. From there, he would continue his journey to Kaisan, the capital of Kasaka, where he would seek more information. At that moment, he also wondered what Koru would do from now on. He couldn''t bring Koru along on his quest for revenge. That was something he had to do alone. At that moment, there was a knock on his door. "Kawao, are you awake?" Koru asked. "Yes, I''m coming. Wait a moment!" "Okay." He quickly put on his clothes and opened the door. Koru stood there and pointed toward the stairs. "Come, I need to show you something important!" "What is it?" "Trust me, you''ll like it." They went down the stairs and left the inn. Neither the owner nor anyone else was on the streets. "Where is everyone?" Kawao asked Koru. But Koru didn''t answer. ,"Is this another trap? Like the one from the church? Am I caught in an illusion?¡ä He grew nervous but remained ready for a fight. Soon, he noticed they were heading toward the docks. After turning one last corner, his jaw dropped in surprise. The entire town had gathered at the docks to celebrate. "What''s going on..." "They''re all here for you!" Koru quickly replied with a smile. He could hardly believe it. Suddenly, everyone cheered: "Three cheers for Kawao, the savior of Isulon!" 38: Eternal Gratitude The celebration lasted for several hours. Many of the residents approached him again to thank him. Among them were many he did not know. Citizens, merchants, and entrepreneurs all came to him during the celebration, some even in tears, to express their gratitude. Kinto also came to him once more. ¡°I wanted to thank you properly again!¡± ¡°It¡¯s alright! You¡¯ve already done that.¡± ¡°No! I mean really thank you! If it weren''t for you, I¡¯d be dead! The last thing I would have done was shout at an innocent man! That¡¯s something I can never forgive myself for.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t say that! Anyone would have acted the same if they were in my shoes!¡± The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. ¡°And that¡¯s exactly what I can¡¯t believe!¡± ¡°Hm?¡± ¡°Not everyone is as kind and helpful as you, Kawao! You probably don¡¯t know this, but I fought in the last War of the Lost¡­ It was hell on earth. Especially for people like me who don¡¯t possess Nyd! We were nothing but ballast that our leaders threw into the battle so they wouldn¡¯t have to deal with us later¡­ To them, we were nothing but dirt on their shoes! There were even moments¡­ when our own ¡®allies¡¯ slaughtered us in battle! In the end, no one would notice who killed whom. For us, everyone was an enemy!... And that¡¯s why I can¡¯t just overlook and ignore your act of kindness!¡± He fell to his knees in front of Kawao, and it was clear he was crying. ¡°Thank you! Thank you! Thank you! I can never thank you enough! Nothing I can do can even begin to repay what you have done for me!¡± Kawao knelt down beside him. ¡°Come on. Stand up!¡± he said, offering his hand. Kinto looked up at him with tear-filled eyes. ¡°That¡¯s what friends are for!¡± Kinto looked as if he had seen God at that moment. He stood up and walked away without saying a word. Kawao just smiled after him. ¡°HEY! KAWAO!¡± someone suddenly shouted. He turned around. It was John. This time, he seemed more sober. ¡°I hope you haven¡¯t forgotten that we still have a word to discuss, right?¡± he asked angrily. ¡°No! Of course not!¡± 39: The Arrival of the Commander John and Kawao looked deeply into each other''s eyes. Unlike Kinto, he did not want to thank him. Kawao had broken his promise to John not to get involved with the pirates. John believed that his village had been destroyed by pirates. And he wanted to maintain this lie for the time being. "I know I broke my promise... And I''m sorry! When the wall fell, I couldn''t just stand by and watch this place be leveled to the ground. I had to do something. I could have left it alone; there''s always a second choice, but I didn''t leave it open. I''ve only recently realized that many things are more important to me than my own life!... So I''m sorry I broke our promise! I hope you can somehow forgive me!" he said, bowing. But John did not respond. This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. When Kawao tried to lift his head, John held him back. "Wait a moment," he said. "No matter what you say, I can never fully forgive you! Even if I wanted to! I can somehow understand you, but at the same time, there is this strong sense of honor within me that constantly tells me that I simply cannot and must not forgive you.... And I know that this voice is right... Just like you are!... So I will never be able to completely forgive you, but I still hope that we can remain friends!" He let go of his head. Kawao stood up and looked deeply into John''s eyes again. "Of course we can!" he replied. Both smiled at each other... Suddenly, a huge bang shook the harbor. Some sparks flew in the sky above the harbor after a long whip of flame discharged there with a bang. The inhabitants all cast fearful glances at the waters in front of the harbor. The commander''s ship was approaching them.
As the ship docked in the harbor, all the festivities had already disappeared, and the residents were all back in their houses. The only ones still there were Kawao, Koru, John, Kinto, and his militia. With a rumble, the soldiers on the ship lowered a gangplank, on which Paikon descended with loud, slow steps. When he reached the bottom, he first looked at Kawao. Both looked deeply into each other''s eyes. 40: Your Wish! Paikon turned to Kinto. "Kinto! What is going on here? Why are you celebrating? The northern part of the island was literally overrun by pirates! Why haven''t you dealt with it?" "We were only recently attacked by them. Their attack would have almost been successful if Kawao and Koru hadn''t been here!" He pointed to the two of them. "During the attack, our wall was damaged! We had to repair it first before we could continue dealing with the pirates!" "Don''t worry about the pirates! On my way here, I destroyed them all and brought the northern part of the island back under control!" A murmur of astonishment rippled through the crowd, and Paikon felt proud for a moment. Then he turned to Kawao and Koru. "So, you two have protected this place? For that, you deserve my respect, as well as the recognition of the army. If there is anything I can do for you, as long as it is within my power, I will do it for you!" Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator. Kawao spoke first. "If you say so, then I would ask you to take me back to the mainland with you." "That can be arranged. You can board the ship! And you? What do you want?" Koru looked him in the eyes and said, "I want you to arrest me!" "What?" "My brother and I helped the leader of the pirates launch the attack on the harbor. Even though I decided to fight against them during the battle, I am still guilty. After my brother''s death, I want to start a new life, far from crime. But first, I must atone for my past crimes. So I ask you to arrest me and judge me!" Paikon thought for a moment. "Alright. So be it! MEN! Arrest him and take him below deck! We''ll deal with him later!" Immediately, some soldiers came from the ship and put Koru in handcuffs. "I still have to thank you for turning yourself in voluntarily! Hardly anyone would do the same as you!" "Thank you." While Koru was taken below deck, Kawao spoke with the soldiers on board for a moment. However, they did not really feel the need to talk to him. He wondered why they were arresting Koru, but he did not want to cause a commotion at the moment. About an hour later, Paikon returned to the ship. He turned to Kawao again. "You will sail with us as our guest. It will take three days to reach Kurani! It is the largest port of Kasaka." Kawao only nodded and hoped that his journey would go smoothly. 41: Suspicion One day after departing from Isulon. Kawao had been given his own cabin on the ship. He woke up early to train. Over time, he increasingly felt that this would make him stronger. He even contemplated some techniques he could develop with his newfound strength. So, he spent the entire morning experimenting with his Nyd. Around noon, Paikon came to fetch him. He said he wanted to have lunch with him in his cabin. Without thinking further, Kawao agreed and joined him for the meal. They had seafood from the surrounding area, which the soldiers had caught during the day. He recognized many of the ingredients, as they were also found on his island. "Tell me, Kawao," Paikon began. If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. "Where do you come from?" "From an island south of Isulon. We were isolated from the outside world for a long time.... I was sent out to see the world beyond ours," he lied. "And what do you think?" "I''ve seen a lot so far. But it''s probably just a fraction of what I''ll see before I can make a proper judgment, but... I think I''m beginning to understand why we isolated ourselves for so long." "Oh really? And why?" He probably shouldn''t have said that. "Well, because... I think those who founded our village had a wrong impression of the world. Maybe they needed more time to see the changed world." "What do you mean by that? How long has your village been around?" "About 200 years, I believe." "So they left just before the first War of the Lost.... Tell me... Something just occurred to me! Have you ever seen a ship like this one on your travels?" ''Is he referring to those who attacked us?'' "Well, yes. In the port of Isulon, there were ships that had a certain similarity to this one." "Then I need to be more specific." Paikon stood up and looked at him darkly. "Did you destroy our reconnaissance ship?" Suddenly, a shiver ran down his spine. He met his gaze seriously and replied, "Reconnaissance ship? I don''t know anything about that!" They remained like that for a moment. Then the look on Paikon''s face softened. "Good. Then I''m relieved!" He turned around and wanted to sit down again. Kawao slowly took a deep breath. BAM! Suddenly, Paikon hit him with full force in the face and threw him through the wall of his cabin. Kawao landed harshly on the main deck and held his hand to his face. "So, you are indeed the one who destroyed our ship!" said Paikon as he walked through the broken wall toward him. 42: Captured Kawao slowly got back on his feet. The soldiers around him were already poised and pointed their spears at him. "How could you have known that?" "I can recognize a person''s intentions by their gaze. And yours clearly revealed that you''re only out for revenge!" "Can you really tell that from a look? Is that your Nyd, or what?" The next moment, Paikon was already in front of him and delivered a brutal punch to his stomach. He slowly lost consciousness. "I don''t need my Nyd to see that. Idiot!" was the last thing he heard before everything went black.
When he woke up again, he was in a cell in the ship''s cargo hold. There were two cells among a pile of weapons and crates. The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. One for him and the other for Koru. "Ah. You''re finally awake! I was already afraid they had killed you!" "I don''t die that easily!" "What happened? Why did they capture you?" He thought for a moment. He couldn''t keep the truth from him any longer. "I destroyed one of their ships!... That was about a week ago!" "What? Why?" "They attacked my homeland! And executed everyone and everything in the worst possible way!... I couldn''t control myself anymore! Before I knew it, I had killed them all and in the end, I awakened my Nyd!... Do you hate me now?" An uncomfortable silence filled the room. "No!" Koru then said, and it felt liberating for Kawao to hear just that one word. "I think I can understand you. At least a little. When my brother and I were driven from our homeland... I also felt a desire for revenge.... But in my brother, it was much stronger. He showed me where hatred and anger can lead!... Fortunately, I was able to dissuade him, but I think because of that, I understand how you feel.... That''s why I just can''t hate you! After all, we are friends! We have to stand up for each other!" After another moment of silence, Kawao simply replied, "Thank you!" He turned to the side and tried to sleep. It had already become dark. Koru smiled softly and also tried to get some sleep.
It was dark. But then the world around him slowly brightened. He realized he was standing in a room. And in front of him were two people with their backs turned to him. 43: Nightmare Over time, he recognized the room. He was in his house in his homeland. And those standing before him... Could it be? Indeed, his parents stood before him. His family smiled at him happily. He ran towards them and wanted to embrace them, but he only fell through a dark cloud of smoke. On the floor, he began to cough and looked around again. The walls, the furnishings... everything started to fall apart. No! It wasn''t falling apart. It was burning! Piece by piece, he had to watch his home burn down. This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. And he was lying right in the middle of it. He tried to turn away, to run away... But he couldn''t. Shortly after, the crackling sounds of the flames stopped, and it became quiet and cool. Slowly and carefully, he opened his eyes. He sat in complete darkness. His parents stood before him again. They smiled at him and waved. Slowly, a hesitant smile crept onto his lips. But the next moment, a massive fire broke out behind them, and within fractions of a second, he had to watch them burn before his eyes. He screamed in horror. He wanted to run to them and save them, but he couldn''t get any closer. No matter how fast he ran. A blink. Behind them appeared the burning facade of his homeland. Another blink. All around them appeared the corpses of the villagers. One final blink. Directly behind them was the burning pile of corpses. Above it, the grotesque body of the village chief was impaled. And behind it all stood a massive dark figure, reaching out its fingers towards him and the village. Kawao fell again. But this time, he knew he no longer had the strength to get up. With his last breath, he let out a cry of despair before the flames finally engulfed him.
He woke up drenched in sweat. "KAWAO!" Koru called to him. He breathed heavily. It took a moment before he realized that it was all just a dream and that he was a prisoner on a ship. "Are you okay? You were twitching and screaming in your sleep!" Kawao slowly caught his breath. "Yes! I''m fine! I just had... a nightmare." 44: A Plan! "A nightmare? What were you dreaming about that made you writhe so much?" Koru asked. "About my homeland... and my family. I saw them burn alive! And I couldn''t do anything about it," he replied, looking sadly at the ground. An eerie silence enveloped the two. But then Koru broke it. "I know that! Those dreams. After my parents died, I had similar ones." "They died? I''m sorry!" "You don''t need to be. Even though they were good people, they gave their lives to lead ours to a better future." "I can''t really say the same!... I only received hatred and anger with a thirst for revenge for their murderers." Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. "That''s not true! I can''t and won''t believe that! They must have given you more than that." "Do you really think so?" "Yes! And if you don''t believe me, then I will prove it to you!" "And how are you going to do that? When we arrive in Kurani, you''ll be judged and, in the worst case, executed!" Koru thought for a moment. "Then I will escape!" "What?" "Yes! I want to atone for my crimes, but if I can''t help you overcome your anger because of it, then I''ll find another way to do it!" Kawao could hardly believe what Koru was telling him. His feeling on Isulon was right. They had become very good friends. "If you''re going to escape, then I''ll escape too! Let''s find a way out of this situation together! Like on Isulon!" Koru smiled at him. "Yes! Let''s do that!" Kawao glanced at the chains that bound him, which he had hardly paid attention to until now. He had a strange feeling when he looked at them. "What''s with these chains? They feel strange." "That''s because they suppress your Nyd! I don''t know what they''re made of, but they''ve been used since the wars!" Koru explained. ''So I can''t break them easily, huh?'' "That''s why we''ll probably have to wait until we''re in prison, if we both end up there, to find a chance to escape!" Kawao thought for a moment. He began to smile. "Maybe we''ll get that chance sooner than you think!" 45: Breakout Part 1 Kawao looked around. He was searching for something he could use as a needle. It was difficult since his hands were tied behind his back. "What are you looking for?" Koru asked. "For something I can use to get us out of here!" Shortly after, he felt something in his hands. A piece of straw! "This might work!" He closed his eyes and concentrated on the straw. Although his restraints were supposed to completely suppress his Nyd, he felt he could still use it. But only very weakly. The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. After a short moment, he managed to slowly channel energy into the straw. He felt it harden and strengthen. Now he just had to try to use it to unlock his restraints. Fortunately, he could reach the lock. Carefully, he inserted the straw into the keyhole and tried to free himself. But, as usual, it didn''t work on the first attempt. ''Damn! What now?... Maybe I can use the energy to shape the straw like a key!'' he thought. He focused again. This time, he could manipulate the straw more easily and shape it correctly. After a few minutes, there was a click and the chains fell off Kawao''s body. "Phew, done!" he said in relief. "You never cease to surprise me!" "Right?" Slowly, he stood up and went to his cell door. Luckily, it was only made of ordinary metal. With some energy and a quick yank, he pulled it off its hinges. "Be quiet! Or they''ll hear us!" "Isn''t that our goal? We have to defeat them anyway." "I was hoping we''d find another way!" Suddenly, they heard hurried footsteps approaching. Shortly after, a few soldiers with drawn spears stood before him. "How did you get out of your cell? Get back in there immediately!" one of them shouted and charged at him. Effortlessly, he dodged the spear thrust and kicked him back towards his comrades with a Nyd-enhanced kick, knocking them all over with the force. "But I don''t want to!" he retorted defiantly to the soldier lying on the ground. 46: Breakout Part 2 "Quick! Get me out too!" Koru called to him. Kawao turned to him and began to pull out the cell door just as they heard voices from above. "What was that?" "Are the prisoners free?" "Inform the commander!" They looked at each other. "Quick!" they said simultaneously. With a yank, Kawao used his Nyd to rip the cell door off its hinges. Shortly after, he started to unlock Koru''s restraints. They heard footsteps again. "Hurry up!" This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version. "Yeah, yeah!" CLICK! The chains came off, and Koru stood up cautiously. But the soldiers Kawao had just knocked down were already back on their feet, and reinforcements were arriving from above. "This doesn''t look good," Koru said. "Got a plan?" "Yes! Duck!" He did. Koru enlarged a wooden splinter he had picked up. It was now the size of a smaller mast. With a swing, he knocked all the soldiers around them unconscious. He almost destroyed the outer walls but they got lucky. However, the noise hadn''t gone unnoticed by those above. "That''s done!" Koru said. "And now?" "Now we have to go upstairs and deal with Paikon! If we defeat him, his soldiers might lose their courage!" "That sounds like a pretty dangerous plan. Paikon isn''t called the ''Ship Scrambler'' for nothing!" "We have no other choice! We can''t swim anywhere. We''re in the middle of the open sea!" "You''re right! But I''ll stay below deck and keep the soldiers busy. Maybe I can support you from there!" Kawao swallowed hard at the thought of fighting Paikon again. But he had no other choice! He would probably have to face even stronger opponents eventually. He took a deep breath. "Let''s do this!"
Meanwhile, Paikon trembled with anticipation for the upcoming fight in his cabin. A soldier knocked. "Commander! The prisoners have broken out of their cells!" A dirty grin spread across his face. "I''m glad I was sent here!" 47: Battle for the Ship Kawao and Koru were on their way to the next deck. As they reached it, the soldiers there immediately thrust their spears. They managed to duck just in time. With a wide kick, Kawao quickly brought them to the ground. They didn''t bother knocking them out further. They needed to get out of the cramped spaces quickly. Again, they climbed up stairs. They reached a narrow corridor, at the end of which stood two more combat-ready soldiers. Kawao and Koru nodded to each other. With a wave of energy, Kawao threw the two soldiers through the door and followed them closely. Now he was outside! Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon. Koru would try to keep the other soldiers from interfering with his fight against Paikon from below deck. But he couldn''t rest for long, as a massive shadow covered him. BOOM! He barely dodged Paikon, who had tried to crush him. "I knew you would come!" Paikon began. "I immediately saw that you are a fighter!" "I have better things to do than die!" "I can imagine. But you won''t leave this ship alive!" he roared and charged at Kawao. Kawao narrowly dodged his punches and kicks. If he hadn''t been enhancing himself with energy, he would have been beaten unconscious by now. Suddenly, he felt a wall behind him. ''Damn! I focused too much on his attacks!'' "Now you''re done for!" Paikon punched with full force. Instinctively, Kawao jumped up and barely managed to dodge. With a loud crash, Paikon''s fist hit the wooden wall, leaving a small hole. Kawao took advantage of this moment while he was above him and struck. CRACK! The blow went directly to his head, causing him to get stuck with his feet in the floor. Kawao landed safely behind him. ''That was a good hit!... Now don''t let up!'' He charged at him again. But he was too late. With ease, Paikon freed himself from the floor and swung his massive fist at him. Again, Kawao could only narrowly dodge by ducking and sliding momentarily across the deck. "Is that all you''ve got? The fight has been decent so far, but can''t you hit a bit harder? Even my grandma fights better than you!" ''Wow! Is the difference in our strength really that great?'' 48: Kawao vs. Paikon "Shall we speed things up a bit?" Paikon asked. "Not really," Kawao replied. For a moment, they stared intensely into each other''s eyes, wondering who would make the first move. Then Paikon took a deep breath and sighed. "You''re still way too tense! Why is that?" "Are you serious? We''re fighting for our lives here!" "Are we? I''m fighting seriously, but in your punches, I don''t feel any hatred, any anger, any will to beat me!" "You''re just too strong. You probably don''t even notice the difference!" "Oh really? My Nyd level is 20,240! What''s yours?" If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement. "...18,450." "See? The difference between us isn''t that great!" Kawao remained silent for a moment and paused. "So, you don''t feel any intention in my punches? Let''s see if you''ll still be running your mouth after this!" "That''s more like it!" Paikon shouted and charged at him again. But Kawao stood completely still. Only when Paikon swung, did Kawao move and dodged just in time. He kept striking. But with each punch or kick, Kawao dodged better and better. "Just dodging won''t defeat me!" Then he saw an opportunity! With a precise strike to the chin, he made the giant Paikon stagger briefly. "Wow! I felt that a bit more!" He regained his composure. "But that''s still not enough! How did you do that just now?" "When I gather energy, it feels like a river of energy is flowing into me. But if someone approaches and steps into this flow, which only I can feel, I can sense what that person is about to do for a moment. So, when you strike, I can sense where and how fast you''re attacking just in time!" "Hmm! That sounds pretty strong!" ''Even though my range is only about 2 meters so far. But I shouldn''t tell him that. Plus, it gets tiring over time since I have to release the accumulated energy to gather more!'' "But that still doesn''t make your punches stronger!" Paikon replied. "You seem to be right!... Then maybe I should try another technique I''ve been working on these past few days!" 49: Technique vs. Technique Part 1 "A new technique? Fine by me. If it makes the fight a bit more interesting." "But Commander Paikon!" shouted some soldiers who had been staying out of the fight on Paikon''s orders. "Silence! I''m having my fun here!" He turned back to Kawao. "Well then! Show me your new ''technique''!" "You''ll regret this." Kawao took a deep breath and concentrated. If he made a mistake, it could have severe consequences for his body. Slowly, he gathered more and more energy. Instead of concentrating it on one point in his body, he spread it throughout his entire body. Paikon watched him, unimpressed. But suddenly, he became uneasy. The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. With a soft crackle, a gray aura slowly formed around Kawao. Paikon could no longer wait. He knew if he did, he would regret it. He quickly grabbed two handles hanging from his belt and attached them to his forearms. In an instant, he swung wide, and fire whips shot out from his hands, lashing towards Kawao. But Kawao managed to dodge at the last moment. Paikon was surprised. He had lost sight of him. "I thought you wanted to wait?" he suddenly heard from behind. He whirled around. Kawao stood there, unfazed by his Nyd. A slight gray aura surrounded him, swirling the air around him slightly. "Ready for round two?" he asked. With an angry shout, Paikon charged at him, lashing wildly with his two whips. Although his attacks were now faster than before, to Kawao, it seemed as if he were attacking in slow motion. Without any trouble, he dodged each of his attacks. ''This works well, but if I direct the energy even slightly wrong, I could break a leg or something.'' He took advantage of this opportunity. He rushed at Paikon and delivered a brutal punch to his stomach. Paikon screamed in pain but continued to strike. But after each punch or kick, Kawao countered with a powerful blow. In no time, Paikon was on his knees. He was bleeding in several places and breathing heavily, but it was clear he was far from giving up. "Had enough? Are you giving up?" Kawao asked him. "Hah hah! Me? Give up? After what feels like an eternity, I finally have a serious opponent, and he''s talking about giving up? Hah hah... No, no, no! I''m far from giving up! On the contrary: I''m just getting started!" He stood up, slightly trembling, and conjured his flame whips again. "Now I''ll show you, greenhorn, how strong a commander of Kasaka really is!" 50: Technique vs. Technique Part 2 Paikon took a deep breath. He slowly swung his whips. "RAAAAH!" Suddenly, he struck. But instead of whipping Kawao, he lashed at himself. Blood splattered as he started to stagger and laugh. Shortly after, the whips began to grow from his skin and multiply. "GAAAAH! HAHAHAHA!" he screamed as the whips spread over his skin like vines. Then he suddenly released them. His body looked as if it had been tattooed with burning ink. "Hah!... Are you ready for the real fun?" But Kawao acted first. He dashed toward him before he could finish his sentence and struck him with such force that he flew off the ship. Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more. "I think you should cool off a bit." Just before Paikon landed in the open sea, he swung his arms and began to spin. Fire whips shot out from his tattoos, rotating around his body at a rapid speed. When the flames touched the water''s surface, there was a loud hissing sound. But most importantly, the rotation of the flames allowed Paikon to approach the ship again, and when he got close enough, he used his whips to pull himself back up. Unfazed, he stood before Kawao. "Did you say something?" Kawao became angry. Both charged at each other, and the fight resumed. Unlike before, it was not just one or two whips attacking him, but easily six or seven! Paikon was also faster. It quickly became harder for Kawao to dodge, let alone attack. If the fight lasted longer, he would be at a disadvantage. After a short while, he noticed that the flurry of whips was setting the ship on fire. "Hey! If you keep this up, you''ll burn down your own ship!" he shouted. Neither of them would benefit if the ship sank. But Paikon didn''t hear him. He was too engrossed in the fight to notice anything else. ''I have to do something!'' He looked around. The fight needed to be moved elsewhere. ... ''That''s it!'' He jumped up and began to climb the ship''s mast. ''This is still dangerous, but better than down below!'' he thought. "Where do you think you''re going?" he heard Paikon call. Shortly after, he dodged more whips that broke the mast he was standing on. Now, he was holding onto some ropes. With horror, he watched as Paikon literally floated upwards. The whips growing from his body clung to everything around him, giving him a firm hold in the air. "Do you really think you have a better chance against the Ship Scrambler up here?" Meanwhile, dark clouds gathered, and it slowly began to thunder. 51: The Wrath of a Gorilla The fight against Paikon had become significantly harder since Kawao had brought him into the air. It was foolish to think it would be better for the ship. His flame whips were now setting the sails and ropes on fire. Moreover, he was much more agile than before. Kawao could no longer dodge every attack. And the hits hurt a lot. If he hadn''t been enhancing himself with energy, one or two blows would have been enough to knock him out. ''If this goes on much longer, I''ll be done for!'' Suddenly, he felt something on his skin. What was that? Water? Rain! It started to rain slowly. They paused their fight briefly. Paikon noticed that the rain slightly weakened his powers. But that didn''t seem to bother him much. Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon. More importantly, the rain was slowly putting out the fires that were destroying the ship. That calmed him. But this brief moment of distraction cost him dearly. Paikon took advantage and whipped him full force in the face, sending him flying back to the deck. "OUCH!" Kawao screamed, holding his left cheek. He slowly got up, careful not to slip on the wet floor. He looked at his hand. It was covered in blood. But at least he didn''t feel a hole in his cheek. That reassured him a bit. With a thud, Paikon landed nearby. "You need to be more careful if you''re going to mess with me!" They glared at each other with rage. Both were pretty out of breath. The fight would soon come to an end. "You''re right! I should be more careful when fighting a brainless gorilla who nearly burns down his own ship!" he retorted. That seemed to have triggered something in Paikon. "I''LL SHOW YOU WHO''S A GORILLA, YOU ROOKIE!" He charged at him, smashing pieces of the floor with every step. Kawao prepared to dodge. But at the same moment he jumped, a large piece of wood broke from the floor, hitting Paikon full force in the stomach and sending him into the air as well. Kawao quickly looked down. Through the hole, he could briefly see Koru, who smiled at him tiredly. He nodded to him and refocused on Paikon. Paikon seemed momentarily dazed by the surprise attack. ''Now or never!'' He gathered all his energy in his fist as he wound up. As he struck, he felt for a moment that his arm would tear apart. But he ignored it and hit him with full force in the stomach again. "UUURGH!" ''I have to get him far enough away from the ship!'' He followed through with the punch as far as possible, sending him flying off the ship with tremendous force. The resulting shock wave knocked all the soldiers on deck off their feet. Paikon flew so far so quickly that it was impossible to see where he landed on the water. But he was definitely far enough from the ship not to return. His arm was numb and his face burned. He would have loved to just let himself fall back, but he knew the fight wasn''t over yet. 52: A Hard Fought Victory Kawao slowly looked around. The soldiers around him were slowly getting back on their feet. Some were horrified that he had managed to defeat their commander. The rest quickly picked up their spears again and began to surround him. ''Can I still handle them?'' he wondered. He needed to deactivate his new technique quickly to avoid serious damage, but he also couldn''t afford to collapse. He readied himself for another fight. Suddenly, a door opened, and Koru stepped out. He also looked exhausted, and part of his clothing was soaked with blood. Kawao couldn''t tell whose blood it was. "Looks like you''re done here too!" Koru said, smiling at him. The soldiers looked at each other in disbelief. They were the only ones left standing. Then Kawao spoke up, "If you want to reach the mainland alive, throw your weapons overboard and start repairing the ship! If you refuse or dare to attack us, you can swim back!" If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. They remained silent for a moment. After realizing their situation, they threw their spears overboard and began repairs. "Good speech!" Koru said, staggering over to him. "You think so? They looked like they wanted to stab us at the first chance." "It''s for the best this way." "We should find somewhere to rest." "Down in our cells, we can remain relatively undisturbed." "Good. We need a plan for when we reach the mainland." They slowly made their way down. On their way, Kawao caught a glimpse of the carnage Koru had left behind. Unconscious or dead soldiers lay everywhere. It looked as if they had all been put in a blender for a few seconds and then scattered on the lower decks. A shiver ran down Kawao''s spine. It was a miracle they had won this fight. Without Koru''s help, he probably couldn''t have beaten Paikon. Only when they reached their former cells did he deactivate his technique. He immediately collapsed and couldn''t move for a while. "Are you alright?" "Yeah. Phew! I tried a new technique, but my body can''t sustain it for very long." "Then you should save it for extreme emergencies! At least you were able to hold your own against Paikon." "Without you, it would have been close!" "I had my own fight down here." Koru also collapsed and started coughing slightly. Kawao could see out of the corner of his eye that there was blood. "Will you make it?" he asked. "Yeah, I''ll be fine. One or two days, and I''ll be back to full strength." "Hopefully in just one day!" "What do you mean?" "We''re supposed to arrive in Kurani tomorrow!" "Really? Then we need to come up with a plan!" Now that he thought about it, their journey had gone by pretty quickly. On the first day, Paikon had captured him. Today, they took over the ship. And tomorrow, they would finally reach Kurani and the long-awaited mainland. Now they just needed to arrive there safely. 53: Finn鈥瞫 Arrival Clouds were gathering as he and his squad arrived in Kurani. Finn watched as they thickened, forming a dense, dark mass of stormy clouds. It was his first time, and for most of his squad as well, being sent on a mission to Kurani. They had just come from Kaisan. The Emperor had given him the mission "personally," or so one of his superiors claimed. What bullshit! They always gave him the hardest and most tedious assignments because all the other "privileged" commanders were far too "busy." He was getting tired of it. But whenever he looked into the hopeful faces of the citizens, it gave him new strength. That¡¯s why he fought. This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. So that ordinary people wouldn¡¯t have to fear people like him. That was his life''s mission, and he would give everything he had for it. "Hey, Fetu! What exactly is our mission here again?" one of his squad members asked him. They were all the biggest idiots he had ever seen in the army. The only reason they accompanied him was to make his missions harder. "We are to receive the report from Commander Paikon and keep our eyes out for any unknown new ''visitors.''" "What kind of visitors?" He would like to know that too. Paikon was supposed to arrive at the harbor tomorrow. It was already dark when they arrived in Kurani. They were on their way to the army garrison. They had come on dark ash steeds. There was no faster mode of transport in all of Kasaka. It had taken them only two weeks from the capital. They reached the garrison. There were no longer any people on the otherwise bustling streets of the city. They dismounted their steeds and brought them to the pen prepared especially for them. They were tired and exhausted from their long journey. His men were already looking forward to their well-deserved sleep. But not him. He still had to report to the commander responsible for Kurani that they had arrived. He hated it with all his heart. He always stood there like a dirty street dog. But he deserved it. And he knew it. Because he was born in the slums of Kaisan, and since his birth, he was "dirty" and worth less than dirt. 54: The Story of Finn Finn was born during the final years of the last War of the Lost. When he was six years old, he was conscripted. This might sound very early, but at that time, the Kasakan government was planning to create a unit of child soldiers, which, along with other projects, was supposed to turn the tide of the war in their favor. Although it wasn''t his fault, he regrets every day of his life that he can''t remember his mother. Before joining the army, he only had faint memories of his time in the slums. But he could still remember his early days in the army very well. If he didn''t follow orders, he was punished. He still has nightmares from that time:
Darkness. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. ... It scared him! But whenever he didn''t do what they said, they dragged him there and threw him in. It was a dark pit, whose bottom he never saw before they threw him in. He always felt like he was falling forever before he hit the ground with a dull thud. At first, he still cried. ... But no one came. No one comforted him. But if he did what they said, he was rewarded. Then he wouldn''t have to go back into the pit again and again. ... But he couldn''t manage it. What they demanded of him was impossible. They wanted them to be better than the other adults. To run faster, fight better, be better... at everything. Yet all he wanted was to be back home. ... With his parents, his family, his home. But unless he delivered good results, he would never be allowed to go home. But he was sure he would never manage that.
After what felt like endless nightmares, he came to the conclusion that he would only make it back home if he obeyed their orders. ... And so he did. The following weeks and months were hell for him. But he fought through. Then, three years after he was taken from his home, the news he had been waiting for all those years finally came. "The war is over! We don''t need you brats anymore! Get back to wherever you came from!" This news made him incredibly happy. After three years in hell, he would finally be allowed to return home. But he had no idea what awaited him there. 55: The Return After Finn had survived three years in the hell of the military, he was finally allowed to return home. Thanks to a peace agreement signed by all countries, peace had prevailed on Unas and the world for many years now. Luckily, Finn and the other children never had to be deployed, as the war ended before they finished their training. Still, he and the others didn''t know how they would get back to their families. Fortunately, the military brought them there. When he arrived in the slums of Kaisan, he didn''t know what to make of it. Although he had few memories of his time before the army, he felt that the situation in his homeland had deteriorated. In his military uniform, he seemed completely out of place here. Everywhere it reeked of sewage. Homeless people lay around, more dead than alive. It didn''t feel at all like he was back home. ... And yet, he had a sense of recognition. This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon. Even if only to a small extent, he felt a connection to this place.
After asking around the slums for a while, he finally stood in front of his home. It was just a simple corrugated iron shack, but he sensed it was the right place. Hesitantly, he entered his home. He would finally see his family again. ... But it was empty. The hut was abandoned. And not just since yesterday. This was definitely the place where he had grown up. Where he had lived before the Kasaka military had torn him from his family. Despair slowly took hold of him. Was this it? Had he hoped all these years for a reunion with a family that no longer existed? He sank to his knees. His gaze drifted into emptiness. What had he been living for until now? ... Then he heard a faint clinking and rattling behind him. He turned around hopefully. But it wasn''t his family he had hoped for. Just another stinking drunk homeless man, slowly limping into the hut, looking for a place to sleep off his intoxication. The man looked at him briefly and muttered something barely understandable. "Hmblrgh! ... It''s him... back again... that son!" Finn listened intently. "What... did you just say?" The man ignored him and lay down in a shady corner. Finn could hardly believe what had just crossed his mind. Could this dirty homeless man be... his father? "Is... Is that you?... Dad?" he asked in a trembling voice. The man remained motionless. He just kept muttering strange things. But this time Finn could understand him better. "He just left us... Because of him she died! She killed herself because of him. Because of him. Because of him! BECAUSE OF HIM!" Suddenly, the man screamed wildly and threw an empty bottle at him, which shattered against the wall. "BECAUSE OF YOU! YOU KILLED HER! IT WAS YOU!" he shouted at him. Finn couldn''t take it anymore. He ran away. He didn''t look back. Away from the slums. Away from Kaisan. Away from... everything 56: The Ring of the Eternal Flame When Finn could think more clearly again, he found himself somewhere in the wilderness near Kaisan. He sat against a large tree, hoping that what he had seen and heard at his home was just a bad dream. But even after pinching and hitting himself multiple times, he didn''t wake up. Over and over, he asked himself why he deserved all this. Slowly, he drew a deep red army knife from his pocket. "Why?" he asked himself. "Why shouldn''t I just end it all? This nightmare and everything connected to it!" He held the knife to his temple and pressed slowly, with increasing pressure. Blood began to trickle down the blade and along the handle. Shortly after, it mingled with his tears. He couldn''t do it. This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. Something was stopping him from ending it all. But why? What did he still want to do? What meaning did his life have now? ... "Do you want to know?" he suddenly heard a voice in his head. Startled and bewildered, he looked around. "Who said that?" he asked aloud. "You know where I am!" Suddenly, he could see a cave through the thicket of the wilderness. Cautiously, he approached it. "Come! I won''t hurt you!" said the voice in a seductive tone. Finn sighed. "What could happen at worst? I have nothing left to lose anyway." Cautiously, he entered the dark cave. After some time, he reached a room filled with light. The light came from an opening in the rock. But what caught his eye more was what lay in the middle of the room. On a small altar lay an intricately decorated ring, set with a fiery red gemstone. "Put it on!" commanded the voice. "Will I find a new purpose for my life then?" "Yes. You will!" Slowly, Finn walked to the altar. As he stood before it, he felt an unusual energy emanating from the ring. "Is this... a Nyd artifact?" "Yes! If you wear it, you will gain unimaginable powers with which you can achieve all your goals!" "But... I have no goals!" "Yes! You do! You just haven''t found them yet! If you put on this ring, you will find your purpose!" Finn felt that the voice was right. If he possessed this power, he might really find a new meaning in life. Carefully, he took the ring and slipped it onto his right ring finger. All at once, an incomparable warmth overcame him. For the first time in what felt like an eternity, he felt safe and secure. 57: For her! Shortly after he received his Nyd, a tremor shook the cave. Instinctively, he fled and barely made it out. For a moment, he was grateful for his military training, without which he would now be dead. Uncertainly, he looked at the collapsed cave entrance. Had he really done the right thing? "Yes, you have!" said the voice, which he could now hear directly in his head. "Where are you? How can I hear you?" "I am your Nyd! Through my artifact, we are connected, but only you can hear me." "Am I slowly going insane?" "No! You are slowly waking up! Because we are connected, I could perceive your entire life up to now." The thought of his power freely roaming through his memories somehow unsettled Finn. If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. "Don''t worry! I won''t harm you! So... you''re looking for a new purpose for your future life, right? How about going back to the military?" "WHAT?!? Why should I go back there? My whole life has been a hellish ride because of them!" "Yes, that may be true. But if you use me, you could achieve a high position there! Then you could change the living conditions in the slums, for example." This thought had never occurred to Finn before. But it''s true! With this new power, he could exploit the military just as they had exploited him. He quickly liked the idea.
Finn then returned to Kaisan. Without delay, he headed to the local garrison and rejoined the military. But this time as a recruit and not as a test subject. Since he came from the slums, he had a tough year of training. He was hated by everyone, and his instructors always gave him the hardest tasks. But thanks to his previous training and his newfound iron will, he fought his way through successfully and became a soldier. Thanks to his strong Nyd, he also managed to achieve the rank of commander in the annual commander selection a year later. Since then, his reputation as a hero of both the citizens and the slums has grown. But even now, about 10 years after becoming a commander, he is still treated the same by his "comrades" as during his time as a recruit. But his iron will has never been broken since the day he received his Nyd. And that''s why it has become easy for him to let people like the garrison commander of Kurani tear him down, even when he''s merely reporting his arrival 58: The Live of Finn "Why do I deserve this?" Makon asked himself aloud as he accepted the report from Finn. Why did it have to be him, the commander of the 17th unit and the garrison leader of Kurani, who had to deal with the disgrace of the army, the commander of the 5th unit, Fetu? He should just give him his report and then disappear. Suspicious and annoyed, he looked down at Finn. Although he held a higher rank than him, he couldn''t help but look down on him. As he took the report, he pondered how he could make his stay here hell. The commander of the 1st unit had promised a promotion to whoever could ensure that Fetu left the army. But ever since he reached the rank of commander, no one had been able to make him leave. Makon sighed. Whether he wanted to or not. He had to get through this.
Finn knew what everyone in the army thought of him. Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences. But he didn''t care anymore. After all these years, he had gotten used to it. And yet he could never afford to make a single mistake in the presence of other soldiers or higher-ranking members of the army. Even if he just looked at someone the wrong way, it would be enough for most to demote him. Of all the members of the army, he definitely had it the hardest. After he handed in his report and was waved off by Makon, he could finally make his way to the canteen. If he was at least a little lucky today, he might still get something to eat. There were few in the army who stood by him. One of them was the supreme commander of the army. Since he was appointed commander, he had openly sided with him. He said he was glad that someone from the slums had made it to the higher ranks of the army and that he would like to support him in the future, as far as it was within his power. Finn was truly grateful for this help. Even though he rarely had contact with him, as most of his assignments were far from the capital. At least he was a bit lucky today. The canteen was empty but not yet closed. So he could still quietly eat the leftovers of the day before retreating to his room. For the soldiers, there were barracks outside the headquarters for sleeping and shelter. But for commanders like him, there were special rooms provided at the headquarters. Since they knew of his arrival, they hadn''t cleaned his room beforehand. How predictable. Before going to sleep, he had to clean everything quietly and secretly. On the one hand, he did not want to wake the others nearby under any circumstances. And on the other hand, it was proper for a commander to set an example for the soldiers under him and show them that they, too, should value cleanliness. After he finally finished cleaning his room, he could finally go to sleep. A glance at the clock told him that he only had 4 hours of sleep before he had to get up again. Four. How much he hated that number. 59: Land ahoy! Finally, the day had arrived when they would reach the mainland. It had been a long and arduous journey, but at last, Kawao would be able to explore the seemingly endless expanses of the continent Unas. His first destination was the capital city of the country Kasaka, Kaisan. But to even get there, he and Koru would have to sneak through the port city of Kurani, where they would dock today. Since they had stolen their ship from Paikon, the commander of the 18th unit of the Kasakan army, they had to take turns keeping watch throughout the night. The two had had more comfortable nights, and it showed on them this morning. In addition to keeping watch, they had to devise a plan to enter the city unnoticed without being detected by the army. After some time, they agreed on a plan and now hoped they would reach the city without trouble.
As they reached the main deck, the blazing sun greeted them. The mainland was not yet in sight, but they knew they had to prepare for what was to come. You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author. The ship''s soldiers only helped them out of fear of being thrown overboard or worse. "Can they swim?" Kawao wondered as he leaned against the ship''s railing, gazing at the seemingly endless blue of the ocean. "Are you alright?" Koru approached him. His worries were visibly apparent. After a brief pause, Kawao replied, "Yes... I''m fine!" "Really? You don''t seem like you''re unaffected by all this!" "Who wouldn''t be?... You understand, don''t you?... At least a little... why I''m doing this. Why I have to do it!" "Yes... and no." A brief pause ensued. Both tried not to show their emotions. "I understand why you want revenge. And I understand why you believe you have to do it. But still, you must realize how much this will consume you. Maybe you already feel it, but... I believe if you continue like this... you won''t reach Kaisan alive." "What do you know about how much this ''consumes'' me? This whole thing is none of your business. I just thought it was better to tell you since we''ve gotten along so well so far... I don''t like lying to my friends, you know." "That''s why I want to understand! Don''t forget my promise! I will steer you away from your path of revenge before it destroys you!" Kawao sighed. "Do what you must. But remember this very well, okay?... If you get in my way or my revenge... you will regret it! And deeply!" For a moment, Koru felt a chill. "Okay... let''s talk about something else. Oh, look! There''s the mainland!" He looked up. Indeed! On the distant horizon, they could see the long stretch of the mainland. Kawao''s eyes sparkled at this sight. Even though he was on a path of revenge, he was still eager to witness the wonders of the continent. "Look at him! Only when it comes to his revenge does he become a beast.... How can I destroy this beast that slumbers deep within him without destroying him too?" Koru wondered. "Come on!" Kawao interrupted him. "Let''s get going!" 60: Stories of the Past Without further ado, the two made their way to the lowest deck of the ship, where their cells were located. Here they would wait until the ship came to a stop at the harbor. Then Kawao would smash the floor, causing the ship to sink. They would then dive through the resulting hole to the sewer canals, through which they would enter the city unnoticed. They crouched right in the middle of the ship and waited. Through small portholes in the walls, they would perfectly time the right moment. Now they waited in silence. Their brief conversation about Kawao''s revenge earlier had left an uncomfortable atmosphere. If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. After some time, Kawao started a new conversation. "Where are you from, actually? What''s it like there?" Koru thought for a moment. "I come from Eroden. It''s a very beautiful land in its own way. There are mostly large and expansive mountain ranges. Many of the people who live there are generally very passive. Our ruler is the same. Despite this, he is known as the officially strongest person in all of Ea. But sometimes... they, no, they can... become very aggressive.... You really don''t want to mess with most people there." "You talk as if you didn''t like being there." "But I did! Don''t get me wrong. But... the way people on Unas react to people like us... makes it a rather unlivable place." "Where did you go after your parents... well, you know." "It''s okay! I don''t mind talking about it. We traveled east. Away from Unas. To the mercenary island realms, the only place in the world where people like us are welcome." "Why are people on Unas so aggressive towards those with a different Nyd than an elemental one?" Koru had told him this on Isulon. People with a Nyd that doesn''t align with one of the four elements are hunted and ostracized. "Well, that''s because..." "Oh! It''s time!" The ship was just entering the harbor. Kawao prepared himself and gathered energy. The moment they came to a stop, he struck. 61: The Infiltration of Kurani With a tremendous crash, a large hole opened up in the hull of the ship. Instantly, the lower deck began to fill with water. Kawao and Koru took a deep breath and dove through the freshly opened hole. They had to be quick in the water. They searched for an entrance to the sewer system. Koru nudged him lightly and pointed to something nearby. A metal grate. They had to go through there. With a small burst of energy, Kawao shot towards the grate. He tried to slide through, but the bars were too close together. With a bit more energy, he bent the bars slightly apart and finally managed to squeeze through. Koru followed shortly after. If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. After swimming a bit further, they surfaced. All at once, they inhaled the sewage-polluted air and nearly vomited. But their will was stronger than their gag reflex, and with one last pull, they dragged themselves out of the filthy water onto the walkways along the sides of the canal. After a short break, they stood up and looked around. Ahead of them, the path split in two directions. "Which one should we take?" Kawao asked. "It doesn''t matter! As long as we don''t end up in the army headquarters, we''re fine!" They decided to take the left path. As they trudged through the canals, they kept changing directions, but eventually, they came to a dead end. "What now?" "There!" Koru pointed to a barely visible ladder that clung to the wall. They slowly climbed up, with Kawao going first to lift the cover at the exit. When they reached the exit, he gathered some strength and lifted it very slowly and carefully. "And? Do you see anything?" "It looks like some kind of side alley. I can''t see anyone! It looks safe." He slowly pushed the cover aside and quietly climbed out. After Koru made it out as well, he closed the cover over the hole. They breathed a sigh of relief. They had made it to Kurani without any problems. The side street they were in seemed very deserted. Trash was scattered everywhere, and one side was separated from the rest of the street by a metal fence. On the other side, they could see some people walking along a clearly busier street. "We should try to blend in with the crowd and find a way out of the city," Koru suggested. Just as they were about to move, they heard a voice behind them. "Who are you two?" 62: Allies in the Shadows Surprised, they turned around. They were sure they hadn''t seen anyone else in the street. But slowly, an older man in tattered clothes crawled out from behind some trash bags. "Did you just crawl out of the sewer?" he asked in a slightly sickly tone. "And if we did?" Kawao replied. The two stared deeply into each other''s eyes for a moment. "Even if you did, it wouldn''t concern me. But..." "Exactly. It doesn''t concern you," Koru interrupted him, signaling Kawao to leave the alley. They had just started to move when they caught the old man''s last words. "But you seem like you could use some help! Or am I wrong?" At these words, they stopped. What did he mean by that? Kawao wanted to find out. "You are not wrong, old man. We could definitely use some help! However, you don''t exactly look like you can provide it." If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it. "Kawao!" "It''s alright." He walked back to the old man. "I may not look like it, but I do know a few people who might be able to help you in your predicament!" "What do you know about our situation?" "Oh, I have my eyes and ears everywhere. Your arrival at the harbor was hard to miss!" How did he know that? Is he a spy? "But it was undoubtedly a good idea to enter the city through the sewers. There probably isn''t a better way for you!" "You seem to know our situation better than we do! But you mentioned people who could help us. Now I wonder: Why do you want to help us?" "Hmm... You just seem trustworthy. And that can''t be said about many people these days." "So you just blindly trust us?" "Yes, I do!" The two exchanged a deep look again. "Then I will trust you too!" "Kawao!" "Calm down! He can be trusted!" "How do you know that?" "I see it in his eyes! He still has hope! When Paikon arrived at Isulon, the mood of the people there quickly shifted from hope and joy to despair and fear. This man knew we came here on an army ship. He knows we are enemies of the protectors of his land. And yet he is not afraid of us, no! He has hope!" "Yes, but still..." "I will trust him, and that''s final!" He turned back to the old man. "If you help us, you surely want something in return! We don''t have much, but..." "I need nothing in return! It is enough for me if you reach my contacts safely and achieve your goals, whatever they may be!" "Okay... if you say so." The old man looked around briefly and then beckoned Kawao to come closer. "So, if you go left here, you need to follow the street until you reach a large intersection. Just before that, you will see a small side street like this one on your right. Go in there and knock twice quickly and twice slowly on the door. Someone will come who can help you!" "Thank you!" "Don''t mention it!" Shortly afterward, Kawao and Koru made their way to the place the old man had told them about. Once they were out of sight, the old man slowly stood up. "Well, I have fulfilled my part of the task. Now we just need to convince them!" 63: On the Search for Safety The people on the street avoided them and gave them strange looks. No wonder, their clothes were wet and they smelled like sewage. But they didn''t let it show. Instead, they walked briskly to the place the old man had mentioned. Fortunately, they found the place without any problems. Aside from the stares from people, they didn''t attract any additional attention. That reassured them. If people knew they were responsible for the death of the commander of the 15th unit, there would undoubtedly be a panic. Without further ado, they approached the door. Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon. It looked like the back entrance of a store. A bit hesitantly, Kawao knocked with the signal the old man had given him. "Are you really sure we can trust him?" Koru asked, still suspicious of the old man. "Don''t worry! He won''t turn us in." Shortly afterward, the door opened, and a very tall, muscular woman in a light red uniform stepped out. "Who are you? What do you want?" she asked in a surprisingly deep voice. "Some stinking old guy told us to knock here. He said you could help us!" "Are you kidding me? Why are you really here?" "I just told you... Hey, Koru! Don''t just hide behind my back!" he called, turning to Koru. "Are you afraid of her?" "Who wouldn''t be? Just look at her!" "What''s wrong with her? She looks beautiful!" "You idiot! Are you blind or what?" "HEY!" the woman suddenly shouted. Kawao turned back to her. "Where did you get that vest?" "This? I found it on the beach in my homeland three years ago." "And where is that?" "My homeland? On an island in the south." The woman thought for a moment. Then she replied, "I see! Thanks for the compliment, sweetie. Quickly, come in before anyone sees you!" Suddenly, she seemed like a completely different person. Now she behaved more like a smitten young woman. Kawao followed her inside, but Koru paused for a moment. "What have I gotten myself into?" 64: The Hideout Part 1 The two followed the strange woman through a large room so packed with clothes that it felt like they were sneaking through a labyrinth. But soon, they reached another door. The woman opened it and motioned for them to go inside. This room felt more like a backroom. The kind where you torture people, not where you store useless stuff. "Wait here for a moment, okay?" she said and left them. "This is definitely a trap!" Koru said shortly after. "You''re just imagining things." "Oh yeah? I think you''re too gullible!" "Oh really? How did you imagine it would go? You saw how people on the street looked at us! The army is probably already looking for us by now. And considering how big the city seemed when we left the sewer, I don''t think we would have made it out in time." "That may be true but..." "But what? Was it stupid to trust the old man? There are piles of clothes here! If we''re lucky, we can disguise ourselves and sneak out of the city!" This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon. "It won''t be that easy," they suddenly heard someone say behind them. A small, gaunt man came through the door and looked at them grimly. "So, you''re the guys Sid talked about? You don''t look much like heroes." "Sid?" "The old man who led you here. He said if people like you came to us, we should provide you with a disguise and fill you in on some things." "Fill us in? On what?" "On the current situation in Kurani and the rebellion in Kasaka! But first, sit down. This might take a while." They did as he said and sat at a small table that stood inconspicuously in the room. "Before we start with anything," Koru began. "Who are you? And where are we?" "Right! I haven''t introduced myself yet. My name is Kinzo. The one who let you in was my wife, Bethany. We run this little clothing shop in the heart of Kurani." "She''s your wife???" "Yes. What did you think?" "I honestly don''t know." "That''s not important now. What''s important is that I fill you in! Let''s start with the rebellion. Since the old emperor abdicated a year ago and his son took over, many things have changed in Kasaka. Maybe you already know this." "A little." "Not really!" "I see. Well, you''ll find out soon enough. In any case, many things have changed for the worse. The military acts like the supreme ruler and only listens to the Council of Ministers. Our current emperor is still a child, likely being exploited by the council to the breaking point. Either way, since then, those who intend to end this current dictatorship have secretly banded together. We play a role as silent supporters. We offer those who are hunted by the government a safe hideout for a short time. But before I go on, I need to know if you are on our side. Sid said we could trust you, but I want to be sure. If we help you, we need to be sure that you will help us too." The two thought for a moment. "I have no problem helping you, as long as you get us safely out of the city," Koru said. "I agree," Kawao concurred. "Good! Then I''ll explain how we will get you out of here!" 65: The Hideout Part 2 "Listen to me carefully, because this is important!" Kinzo began. "As I mentioned, we only shelter people here for a short time. However, for your specific case, we already have a plan!" "What do you mean by ''specific'' case?" Koru interrupted him. "I wasn''t told, but you''ll find out once you''ve safely left the city." Koru still seemed somewhat suspicious. "Anyway, we''ll give you disguises so you won''t stand out in the city. Also, we''ll provide you with water and soap to deal with that beastly stench." Kinzo held his nose as he spoke. "Did you come here through the sewers or what?" "Yes." "Oh, God! Alright then. Once you''ve taken care of that, you should leave here immediately. We''ve already notified someone outside the city who will help you get out. Until this person arrives, you should look around the city a bit. But watch out for the soldiers!" The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. "Why do we need to leave here at all? Can''t your contact pick us up here?" "From what I''ve heard, you have the commander of the 15th unit on your conscience. The army will definitely search every corner of the city, including here. You''re not safe here. Neither is the contact if they are seen coming here. That would also put us in danger!" "I understand." "Good. Let''s get started then!" Kinzo then gave them fresh clothes and washing supplies. Meanwhile, Kawao noticed something. "Hey, Kinzo!" "What is it?" "Do you happen to know a Kinto who lives on Isulon?" Kinzo thought about it for a moment. "Yes, I know him! He''s my older brother." "Why do you live apart?" "He probably told you how he fought in the last War of the Lost, right?" "Yes." "While he fought for our ''country,'' I tried to take care of our mother. We lived here in Kurani even back then. Our father also died during that war, which is why our mother didn''t want him to lose his life there too. But he didn''t listen to us. We parted in anger. A few years later, a major battle broke out between Kasaka and Nagasa here in Kurani... During this battle... she died. Her last words were: ''Save yourself!'' A few days after the battle, he returned. He was devastated, and I fought with him again. I said it was his fault she died because he wasn''t there. She worried he would fall in the war, but in the end... it was her.... I hoped he would learn his lesson, but... He left again. This time to Isulon. Since then, I haven''t heard from him again." A heavy silence settled over the room. "Did he..." "No! He didn''t mention you at all when we were there." "I see." He left wordlessly, leaving the two alone. 66: Going Underground After putting on their disguises and washing up, Kawao and Koru cautiously explored the city. Kawao initially wanted to keep his vest on, but Kinzo insisted it was a very bad idea. He would learn more about it once they left the city. The whole rebellion story was starting to seem quite mysterious to him. Shortly after leaving Kinzo''s and Bethany''s shop through the back exit, Koru decided it might be better if they split up. "They surely know from the people on the ship that we are traveling together," he said. Kawao agreed, and they parted ways. Kinzo had said their contact would find them, even if they went underground in the city. What would this contact be like? Kurani was much larger than the harbor of Isulon. At least three times as large, Kawao thought. He was pretty sure he would easily get lost. The city was surrounded by a small mountain range, with only a small valley in the north providing access. It would probably not be easy to get out of here. Shortly afterward, he encountered two soldiers. Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site. He tried to act normal, and it worked. The disguise was effective. He wore a T-shirt with the words "Fire for Kasaka" and deep red shorts with sandals. Until now, he had always traveled on foot. It felt strange to wear something so different. Despite everything, he still didn''t know where to go. Then he saw a tavern nearby. It was called "The Boiling Cauldron." He remembered hearing some interesting stories and rumors in the tavern on Isulon. Without much thought, he entered. Inside, it was very crowded and stuffy. He slowly squeezed his way to the bar, where, fortunately, an empty seat awaited him. Relieved, he sat down. "Quite crowded here, isn''t it?" someone next to him asked. "Yeah, but it''s nice to see the place doing well," he replied. "Ha, that''s true!" While he waited for the bartender to take his order, the cloaked man next to him struck up a conversation. "Where are you from?" Kawao thought for a moment. Kinzo had given them an alibi if anyone questioned them. "I''m from Kaisan. Visiting some relatives." "Kaisan, huh? Quite a long way from here." "You can say that again." "I haven''t been to the capital in a long time. How are things there? Has much changed?" "Same as always. I don''t know when you were last there, but not much has changed in the past few weeks." "Oh, really? No big changes in the capital?" "Not that I know of." "When did you leave?" "What''s with all the questions?" "Oh, nothing. Just heard some rumors. For example, that the army recently cleared out the slums in a major operation." Kawao thought for a moment. This could be a trap! Maybe I should just play along. "Oh, yeah. Now that you mention it. Just before I left, they really..." BAM! Suddenly, the man slammed his head against the bar. Before he could lift his head, he slammed it down again, putting a hole in the bar. With a jump, everyone in the tavern moved back a few meters. The man prepared for a third strike, but before he could land it, Kawao dodged and moved away from him. His head was bleeding slightly, but he was not seriously injured. "What the hell is this?" he shouted at the man. The man looked at him nonchalantly and replied, "You are suspected of killing the commander of the 15th unit. In the name of the army of Kasaka, I, Fetu, the commander of the 5th unit, will now arrest you!" 67: New Day, New Mission After barely two hours of sleep, Finn woke up again. After all these years of never being able to sleep for long, this was nothing new to him. After a few officers inspected his room (much more thoroughly than anyone else''s), he made his way to the canteen. There, he could feel the angry looks of the other soldiers. But he didn''t care. Wordlessly, he ate his meal as far away from the others as possible. The only ones who dared to approach him were those in his unit. "When we''re done, we''ll head straight to the harbor! We need to be there at 10 o''clock sharp!" The others nodded grimly. Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there. Sometimes he wondered how much longer he could put up with all this crap. After they finished, they made their way to the harbor without any major detours.
The residents of Kurani seemed relieved when he was around. That made him happy. Recently, he had ensured that the slums of Kaisan received a visual improvement, which led to more visitors going there to get a better picture of the city. He hated the work he did for this. But the results made it all worthwhile. Shortly afterward, they reached the harbor. Even a little before 10 o''clock. That reassured him. They could already see Paikon''s ship. It would probably only be a few more minutes before the ship docked and he could fulfill his duty of receiving the report from Commander Paikon. His men looked visibly bored. "Ah, Commander Fetu!" someone suddenly called out to him. It was the harbormaster. He kept track of every ship that approached or left Kurani and their activities here. "Are you here to greet the commander?" "Yes, indeed. That''s why I''m here. And you, if I may ask?" "I''m supposed to receive a report from him." "Ah, I see." The ship safely reached the harbor. But something was wrong. The stationed soldiers looked as if they wanted to leave the ship as quickly as possible. "What''s going on?" he shouted to them, but suddenly a loud bang shook the ship, and he and his men watched as the ship in front of them slowly sank. 68: In Search of the Origin With horror, his men watched as Commander Paikon''s ship sank before them in the harbor of Kurani. Finn reacted immediately. Without a running start, he jumped onto the ship and quickly looked around. All the soldiers on deck instantly broke into a panic. He barely had time to come up with a plan. He had to act now! "LISTEN UP! YOU STILL HAVE TIME TO JUMP FROM THE SHIP TO THE DOCK! I''LL FIND OUT WHAT CAUSED THIS!" he shouted with all his might. Shortly afterward, they did just that. Some immediately sprinted and saved themselves on solid ground. He, on the other hand, ran to the lower decks. Before they flooded, he hoped to find the cause of the shipwreck. With all his strength, he sprinted below deck. But almost everything was already underwater. Without thinking twice, he dived in. After a short time, he found his way to the lowest decks. There, he found a large hole in the hull. Someone had caused it! And where was Paikon? A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation. All questions he would have time to address once he was back on land. But as he tried to swim back, he noticed that some debris was blocking the stairs. And he didn''t have much air left. He had no other choice. Using his Nyd, he punched a hole in the ship''s wall and shot out through it. With one blast, he reached the docks again, where his and Paikon''s men were waiting. The ship had now completely sunk in the harbor. Without hesitation, he turned to the surviving soldiers. "I am Commander Fetu. What happened here? Tell me!"
After the soldiers told him their story, some things became clear to him. Or so he thought. Because in the end, he wasn''t much wiser than before. The only thing he knew was that two people, Kawao and Koru, had defeated Commander Paikon, destroyed the ship, and were now on the run somewhere in Kurani. From the soldiers'' descriptions, they were probably mercenaries. But who had sent them? And why? He knew that his top priority now was to find and capture the two. He turned to his unit. "Men, listen up! Commander Paikon was murdered by two unknown mercenaries! It is our top duty to find them and take them into custody! Search the city! Look for anyone who seems out of place and arrest them! Dismissed!" Immediately, they set off. The good thing about his men being idiots was that they hardly cared how serious the situation was. To them, this was just insignificant work anyway. Even if it involved a commander dying. But he had no time to think about that now. He had to start his own search as well. Before he left, he told the harbormaster to keep quiet about what had happened for the time being. The harbormaster agreed and went on his way. He took one last look at the city. Now he had to start his search too.
He had been searching for about two hours and hadn''t found a single suspicious person. As a commander, he had to set an example for his unit. Even if his unit was likely arresting random people who had nothing to do with the wanted individuals. He sighed. Once again, he wondered what he had done to deserve all this. Suddenly, he noticed a tavern nearby. It was called "The Boiling Cauldron." Could they possibly be there? A tavern would be the ideal place to hide from the army or go underground. But he had to remain undercover. It wouldn''t be good for his reputation if word got out that he frequented such places. And that even though his reputation, at least in the army, was already bad enough. Without further thought, he pulled up a hood and entered the tavern. 69: The Inevitable Slowly, Kawao got back on his feet. The people around them began forming a circle. "The commander of the 5th unit?" Kawao asked. Shortly after, he realized the situation he was in. Standing before him was someone ten ranks higher than Paikon. And he had only won against Paikon thanks to Koru. Against this Fetu, he didn''t stand a chance. He had to find a way to escape. "HEY! DON''T DESTROY MY PLACE!" the owner yelled at them. Fetu turned briefly to him. "I''m sorry, but I''m arresting a very dangerous man here! I''ll cover the damages. It would be better if you and everyone else left!" he said politely. Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. There was a brief silence. "That wasn''t a request. GET OUT!" Suddenly, panic erupted. Everyone tried to leave the place in a hurry. ''This is my chance!'' Kawao thought and tried to blend into the crowd. But just before he could reach the exit, someone pulled him back. It was Fetu. All at once, he threw him across the room. He crashed into some tables and chairs, but since he had already gathered some energy, he didn''t get hurt. Quickly, he got back on his feet. Everyone was gone. Only the two of them remained in the place. "I''m not letting you escape that easily!" "So I have to fight!" "You could also just surrender." "No, I can''t!" As they spoke, he continued to gather energy slowly. If he acted quickly enough, he might be able to knock him out with one blow. At least, he hoped so. After they stared at each other intently for a moment, Kawao charged at him. With all the strength he had available at that moment, he tried to land a blow to Fetu''s head. But Fetu dodged all his attacks as if he had seen them coming. After several more unsuccessful attacks, Fetu found an opening and kicked Kawao with full force against a wall. "Argh!" He hit the wall with such force that he needed a moment to catch his breath. But just as he tried to stand up again, he saw his opponent already standing before him, looking down at him. "Is that all you''ve got? I''m surprised you defeated Paikon." 70: Gathering Energy He tried to dodge in time, but Fetu kicked him again. He used his hands to deflect the kicks or at least reduce the damage, but they hit him like heavy hammer blows, pounding against him with full force. ''I have to do something! Otherwise, my arms won''t hold out much longer! I need more strength!'' He tried to gather energy from his surroundings, but as long as Fetu kept kicking him, he could hardly concentrate. Slowly but surely, he started to regain his strength. During that short time, he had to learn to gather energy even in such situations. And the longer Fetu kicked, the better he managed. Until he had enough strength to catch his kick with his hand. "That''s enough!" he said, pushing him back a few meters, giving him enough time to get back on his feet. The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. They stared at each other again for a moment. "You have a strange power," Fetu suddenly remarked. "And so do you." Fetu smiled gently. "I haven''t even activated my Nyd yet. You''ll have to do better than that." "Like this?" Suddenly, Kawao lunged forward and struck again. This time, his opponent could barely dodge. Good! If he could gather more strength, he might have a chance! As he continued to strike and occasionally dodged some attacks, he diligently gathered more energy. Through his training and his fights on Isulon and against Paikon, he had constantly felt that he could gather more strength each time. But would he be able to gather enough to defeat someone of Fetu''s caliber? He had to try! At least until he had a chance to escape. Then suddenly, he felt something. Skin! He could now hit him with his attacks! Filled with motivation and new determination, he fought on. Slowly, he even started pushing Fetu back. Then he saw an opening! He landed a blow to his midsection. And immediately after, he struck him with an uppercut to the chin. For a moment, it looked like he was actually dealing damage. Finally, he delivered a powerful roundhouse kick that sent Fetu crashing into the bar. Without hesitation, he wanted to rush in and continue pummeling him, but Fetu got back on his feet immediately. He didn''t look like Kawao''s attacks had affected him much. "Interesting. You''ve gotten better!" he said, smiling gently again. 71: The Tide Turns! Fetu watched him steadily while he slowly went through some warm-up exercises. He stretched, cracked his joints, and took deep breaths. "Thanks for not attacking me while I warm up," he said casually to Kawao. "For some reason, I can''t shake the feeling that you''re not inherently a bad person. I don''t have a reason to take every chance to attack you," Kawao replied. Fetu seemed surprised and then burst into wild laughter. "Hahahaha! You''re a funny one! You have a ''good'' feeling about me? And you didn''t have that with Paikon? You''re a strange guy!" "Paikon seemed more like a leashed wild beast, just waiting for the chance to be unleashed." "Hmm... You might not be entirely wrong there, but you''re still mistaken!" "In what way?" "I''m worse than Paikon!" he said with a sly smile and charged at Kawao. Slightly surprised, Kawao readied a combat stance. Fetu opened the next round with a barrage of powerful punches and unexpected kicks, which Kawao couldn''t deflect in time. Moreover, he felt that his opponent was now hitting harder and fighting more strategically. He fought like someone with a lot of experience against enemies like Kawao. This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. "Is that all you''ve got? Where''s the fighting spirit you had before?" Kawao had no choice. Just like before, when he was on the ground, he had to gather more energy. But this time, he had to do it directly during the fight, making it harder to concentrate. He had to focus more on not getting beaten up. Yet, just like the last time, he managed to gather a bit of energy, even if only a little. He had to build on that! He had to improve in the heat of the moment! Bit by bit, he had to try¡ªno, learn¡ªhow to gain energy during a direct fight. After a few minutes, a slight shift in power became noticeable. It became easier for him to react to Fetu''s attacks. He could even start dodging his kicks. The fight had now moved to the center of the bar. Around them lay chairs, stools, overturned glasses, bottles, and some tables. Kawao now had enough strength to look around while fighting. How can I use the environment to my advantage? ... I''ve got it! When Fetu next tried to land an uppercut, Kawao ducked under it and grabbed a stool from the floor. Luckily, Fetu didn''t notice and tried to hit him with his other fist. With a twist, Kawao dodged and channeled as much energy as possible into the stool, then slammed it into Fetu''s unprotected side with full force. Fetu screamed in pain and was thrown against the bar counter again by the sheer force behind the stool. But this time, he literally crashed through the counter, leaving a big hole. The stool was still intact, but when Kawao withdrew his energy from it, it immediately fell apart. The excess power was too much for the object. He wanted to charge at Fetu again, but then he remembered that Fetu hadn''t even used his ability yet. Speak of the devil. Shortly afterward, Fetu rose from the wreckage of the counter. Apparently, the attack had really hurt, as he now had visible injuries on his face. He was bleeding! For a moment, Kawao was relieved to find that he could stand up to such a strong opponent. But his relief vanished just as quickly. With a dark look, Fetu stared at him. "You really are strong! Now I understand how you could kill Paikon! I should probably finish this quickly before you get even stronger," he said slowly. Shortly afterward, a scorching aura spread throughout the tavern. 72: The Commander鈥檚 Nyd What should I do now? Kawao thought, feeling the increasingly hot aura emanating from Fetu. Should I attack first? Or should I wait and let him come to me? ... Shortly after, he decided to make the first move. Suddenly, he leaped at Fetu, ready to strike. But Fetu didn¡¯t move. He just continued to glare at him darkly. Undeterred, Kawao swung. But he didn¡¯t hit him. Instead, he hit an invisible barrier so scorching hot that he immediately screamed and pulled his fist back. He glanced at it. If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. With just one blow, he had nearly burned his fist. He knew instantly that if he continued to fight like this, he wouldn¡¯t be able to go on due to severe burns. Fetu looked him straight in the eyes. "My turn." He rushed at Kawao. Kawao could barely react in time and narrowly dodged a blow that burned a hole through a support beam, causing it to collapse. "Now I¡¯m serious! You¡¯re as good as dead!" Fetu said, lifting half of the beam. Shortly after, the beam in his hand began to burn and within seconds, turned to ashes. But he still held something. He now held a fiery replica of the beam in his hand. "Unlike most other commanders, I don¡¯t have my own weapons. Do you know why?... Because I can easily make my own!" He swung his new weapon. This time, Kawao couldn¡¯t dodge in time. But he managed to defend himself. He quickly concentrated as much energy as possible into his arms, but the strength and heat were too much for him. With a leap, he was thrown through the hole in the bar counter, crashing into the shelf behind it, which held the liquor. Screaming in pain, almost stunned, he felt the unbearable agony of the burns on his arms, the alcohol running over his wounds, and the shards of glass from the spirits. But Fetu didn¡¯t wait for a moment. He formed his hand into a finger gun and aimed at him. With a "shot," a small fireball flew at Kawao and ignited an explosion upon impact, completely destroying the bar counter. Fetu lowered his weapon. "Rest in peace, you scumbag," he said, spitting on the shard- and debris-covered floor. 73: Inconsistent will! ¡°Are you not being a bit too hasty?¡± he suddenly heard behind him. He turned around abruptly. To his slight astonishment, he saw Kawao standing in front of him. Well, if you could still call it ¡°standing.¡± He was barely managing to stay on his feet. He had just barely jumped across the room with all his might at the last moment, just as the flames touched him. The blast wave from the explosion had also helped. ¡°You never cease to surprise me, intruder!¡± ¡°My name is Kawao! And thank you. Apparently, I clearly underestimated you!¡± ¡°That will be your downfall!¡± ¡°I¡¯m still standing!¡± ¡°Yes. For now!¡± Fetu raised his pillar of flame and attacked him again. But this time he successfully fended off the attack. Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. Shortly before the explosion, he had managed to grab a metal rod. He had infused it with as much energy as he could. Now he was able to keep up with him. ¡°You¡¯re starting to get on my nerves!¡± ¡°Then I must be doing something right!¡± They distanced themselves a bit from each other. Shortly thereafter, Kawao took the first step again and struck with his rod. Fetu smiled wearily and lowered his weapon. ¡°Don¡¯t you still get it? You can no longer hurt me!¡± But to his extreme surprise, he did hit him. His blow was strong enough to press against his barrier so much that he managed to hit his body. The energy in the rod was strong enough to withstand his heat. Fetu spat some blood and immediately took a few steps back. ¡°How did you manage that? Even if your rod can withstand my pillar, you shouldn¡¯t be able to hurt me with it! For that, you¡¯d have to easily destroy my club!¡± ¡°You overlooked something important! I didn¡¯t just reinforce my rod with energy. I still have my body full of energy that I¡¯ve gathered in battle! When I infuse an object with energy, it doesn¡¯t strain my body!¡± ¡°I see. So that¡¯s your Nyd! You can collect and use energy from the environment! Then you must not be from here!¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. I come from an island in the south. We all lived there peacefully and carefree until you showed up and wiped out everything there to the last spark!¡± ¡°What are you talking about? I know nothing of that. Regardless, you killed a commander of the Kasakan army. Therefore, I am obliged to take you into custody!¡± ¡°You mean to kill me! So far, you¡¯ve behaved exactly as I¡¯ve seen you: as insane murderers! I want only one thing from you! Bring me the one who commanded the attack on my homeland and hand him over to me! Grant me my revenge! Then I will surrender!¡± ¡°I¡¯m supposed to hand over an admiral to a lunatic like you! You¡¯ve lost your mind!¡± Fetu jumped at him and raised his weapon to attack. Kawao struck against it with full force. A battle of weapons had begun. 74: I have become stronger! For a few minutes, the two had been engaged in a spectacular fight. Both were on the same level. Fetu had years of experience fighting with any kind of weapon he could create with his Nyd. Kawao, on the other hand, fought with the rod as if it were a shorter spear. He also had years of experience and training with that weapon. Thus, neither gave an inch. Even if they managed to hit each other now and then, they didn¡¯t waver. The first to give up loses! Both were aware of that. But just as Kawao thought he couldn¡¯t hold on any longer, he saw an opportunity. He seized it instantly and delivered a solid blow to Fetu¡¯s ribs. You could even hear them crack slightly. Fetu screamed in pain. Kawao used this to land a powerful jab to his stomach with the rod. With this, he managed to knock Fetu to the ground. But instead of jumping back up immediately, Fetu clutched his stomach and started to vomit. This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. Kawao sprinted to take advantage of his moment of weakness but then paused for a moment. For a brief moment, he felt pity for his opponent. He remembered how, during his training as a hunter, he was in a similar situation. A tiger had broken his ribs, and shortly afterward, he had fallen down a small cliff. The tiger fortunately left him alone, but he remembered lying on the ground just like Fetu now, literally throwing up his will to live. But that brief moment of pity was a huge mistake. Fetu was only pretending to be in agony. He used the moment to control the flames from the explosion that were now slowly burning down the tavern with a wave of his hand. Suddenly, the flames coalesced into spears that shot across the room like snakes and darted at Kawao. He couldn¡¯t defend himself in time and was hit by them with full force. But instead of dissipating, they kept pressing against him. So much so that he was hurled through one of the walls. But as if that wasn¡¯t bad enough, the flames kept pushing him. Through the second wall, the third, and only at the fourth did they relent, causing him not to break through it but leaving him with a strong impact nonetheless. With a dull thud, he fell into a rundown alley. He could hardly believe that this attack had actually thrown him through an entire building and the wall of the tavern. Hesitantly, he tried to get up again, but with little success. Suddenly, he heard slow clapping. He looked around. Fetu stood a few meters in front of him, slowly approaching while clapping sarcastically. How could he be walking so easily? ¡°You really entertained me!¡± he began. ¡°Oh! Are you wondering why I¡¯m still so fit? Well, even though your attacks packed a punch, I¡¯ve had to endure much more over the years. Be it from criminals like you or from my dear and friendly comrades in the army! If I were to go down from that, I would never have been able to act as the commander of the 5th unit, you know? But at least it makes sense that you killed Paikon.¡± ¡°Do you think so? You¡¯re pretty tough! But the fight with you has also made it clear to me that I¡¯ve become stronger from the fight with Paikon. If I can still manage it, I¡¯ll try to use the same technique I almost won with against him! Only this time¡­ I¡¯m going all out!¡± 75: Stage One! ¡°The technique with which you almost defeated Paikon? I thought you killed him!¡± ¡°Not without help!¡± ¡°Hm¡­ Never mind. I should knock you out before you use something like that!¡± ¡°Try it.¡± Full of rage, Fetu rushed at him and swung for a punch. But Kawao made no effort to dodge. Fetu struck. With little effort, Kawao rolled under the blow and came to his feet, limping. ¡°How did you manage that?¡± ¡°That remains a secret.¡± He continued to attack him. But every time, Kawao dodged by a hair¡¯s breadth. ¡®This guy is already half dead! How can he dodge so easily?¡¯ With each attack he evaded, Kawao moved faster and more confidently. He began gathering energy again! Over time, a faint grayish aura slowly appeared around him. Stolen novel; please report. ¡®I must stop him before he finishes!¡¯ Fetu decided. With a wave of his arm, he burned all the trash in the alley to ashes. He gathered the resulting flames with another hand motion around his right fist. ¡°Prepare for your end!¡± he shouted and charged at him. Kawao still stood motionless. But now, he was in a dead-end. He could no longer dodge! But he didn¡¯t need to anymore. Just before Fetu¡¯s blow reached him, Kawao looked deeply into his eyes. This startled Fetu, but he didn¡¯t stop his blow. Despite everything, he didn¡¯t hit. Kawao simply leaned his head to the side. His fist narrowly missed his face. But despite the immense heat he radiated, it seemed as if it didn¡¯t bother him at all. He even looked completely different. The aura around him was now very distinct. Swirling around him with a mercury-like gray tone. His muscles tensed almost to the limit and his normally short hair now reached his shoulders, taking on a strong silver hue. They almost blinded one. Even his eyes had a slight grayish shimmer. Fetu immediately knew that this new technique meant big trouble. He instinctively retreated a few meters, but Kawao didn¡¯t distance himself from him. No matter how fast he ran, his opponent was always equally close to him. He got goosebumps all over his body. ¡°Grey Kick!¡± Kawao said quietly and delivered a brutal kick to his ribs. This time he could hear them breaking loudly. But before he could even scream, Kawao followed up with an uppercut that sent him a good two meters into the air. He felt like he was about to lose consciousness. ¡°Grey Punch!¡± With a targeted blow to the stomach, he sent Fetu flying. It felt as if he had been tied to a rocket before he began to fall and landed with a loud crash on a rooftop. Now he finally had the time to scream. ¡°AAAAAAAAAAHH!!!¡± he roared in agony as he tried to move. But his body no longer obeyed him. Instead, he spat blood. And not just a little. He became fearful. Would he be able to survive this? Kawao landed a few meters away from him and looked at him. ¡°It took a while, but I finally mastered the technique. It¡¯s called ¡®Grey Glare.¡¯¡± 76: Awakening! Fetu could no longer respond to that. He was far too injured. If he even tried to say a word, he knew he would lose consciousness. ¡°In principle, it works quite simply!¡± Kawao began to explain his new technique. ¡°I gather as much energy as possible and distribute it evenly throughout my body. Almost like filling a vessel with water. When I attack, I focus part of this energy on the body part I¡¯m attacking with, for example, my fist. But since I¡¯ve already gathered more than enough energy there, this transfer of power only happens during the actual strike. For a moment, I have more energy in my fist than it can hold. This, of course, is an extreme strain on the body and the control required for it is quite intense. That¡¯s why I can only use this technique for a few minutes¡­ So much for that. I¡¯ll be off then!¡± This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience. ¡°You¡­ should have¡­ surrendered.¡± ¡°What was that?¡± Fetu lost consciousness. Suddenly, his body twitched violently, and he got back on his feet. The upper parts of his uniform burned away, and his hair grew significantly longer. It turned fiery red, and pitch-black flame tattoos slowly appeared all over his body. His nails grew longer, and he began to smile. When the trembling stopped, he stood motionless. Then he looked at the sky. ¡°Ah!¡­ How many years has it been since I last saw the sky and breathed fresh air?¡± ¡°What¡¯s wrong with you? What are you talking about?¡± ¡°Oh, forgive me. I forgot he had been fighting.¡± He looked at Kawao. His eyes now appeared swollen and crazed. As if he were trying to look everywhere at once. ¡°I am the one you would call Fetu¡¯s Nyd! I am the one who lends him his power, the fire spirit Hino! Unfortunately, he can barely control it. When he just lost consciousness, I was able to take over his body. The first time in two years, how wonderful! Finally, I can fight and move a bit again!¡± He slowly walked towards him. Kawao was baffled. He had no idea what he was dealing with. But he knew that, unfortunately, the fight was not over yet. 77: Wild Beast The two now stood directly facing each other. Hino smiled at him like a madman who had just escaped from an asylum. Kawao, on the other hand, looked confused, still not understanding what had just happened to Fetu. Then, suddenly, Hino kicked him in the chin, sending him into the air. The kick itself had almost knocked him unconscious, but what followed was a punch that he barely managed to block. Nevertheless, he flew far away, but managed to land safely on another rooftop. He slowly caught his breath. ¡®What happened to him?¡¯ Before he knew it, Hino was in front of him again. He kicked at his chin once more, but this time Kawao managed to dodge. ¡®I have to focus now!¡¯ He managed to dodge the following attacks well. But he found no opening in his defense. ¡°Do you plan to look for an opening all day?¡± Kawao got goosebumps. Suddenly, Hino moved many times faster and unleashed a relentless series of punches and kicks. Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings. He was airborne again. But this time, he was struck downwards. After crashing through several walls, he landed in a street. People scattered in panic and began to scream. ¡°Pah! Humans. Like flies, only more annoying!¡± Hino remarked as he landed slowly in front of him. ¡°What¡¯s wrong with you? Just a moment ago, you seemed so big and strong. Where has that strength gone? Are you still looking for a way to escape?¡± ¡°And what if I am?¡± Kawao replied. Slowly, he got back on his feet. ¡°I thought I had defeated you and then you turn into some monster that almost kills me. You know I can¡¯t use this technique for long! Why should I fight an uncertain battle until I might die?¡± Hino looked at him, bored. Suddenly, he vanished. In the next moment, Kawao spat blood. Hino¡¯s fingernails had extended and dug into his side. He felt an overwhelming heat radiating from them. Hino withdrew his nails, splattering blood on the surrounding buildings. ¡°I think you¡¯re misunderstanding something, kid! I could kill you anytime! You¡¯re not fighting to escape, you¡¯re fighting to survive. The rules are simple. You kill me and survive or I kill you and survive. If you still don¡¯t understand that, then maybe you don¡¯t care much about living!¡± Kawao¡¯s legs began to tremble. ¡®Am I going to die here?¡¯ he wondered. He blacked out for a moment. Suddenly, he was floating in complete darkness. ¡°You will not die here!¡± a voice declared to him. He recognized it. It was the same voice he had heard on Isulon when he had nearly died fighting the tank. ¡°What do you mean by that?¡± ¡°I told you to take care of your body! Instead, you keep pushing it to the limit¡­ Well, I guess this isn¡¯t your fault. You tried to escape at first, but he was too cautious. And now a fire spirit has taken over his body. I don¡¯t think you realize how dangerous the situation is right now!¡­ I have no other choice. I¡¯ll get you out of here! But after that, you¡¯ll have to figure out how to put your body back together!¡± ¡°Wait, what?¡± But before he could protest, he grew tired and fell asleep. Hino moved in for the next attack. He intended to decapitate him with a strike. But unexpectedly, Kawao dodged and landed a kick to his face. Hino stepped back a few steps. He smiled again. ¡°Looks like you¡¯re finally taking this seriously.¡± Kawao¡¯s pupils turned white, and he began to behave more like a wild animal. ¡°It¡¯s really been a long time. Maybe 50 years? Since I last saw someone who mastered the ¡®Rage of Survival¡¯!¡± 78: Rage of Survival ¡°The ¡®Rage of Survival¡¯! With this technique, the Nyd user switches their consciousness with that of their Nyd. However, this is only possible if the Nyd also has its own consciousness, like me! I really didn¡¯t think I would ever meet someone who could pull that off again.¡± Hino started smiling again. ¡°Time for some fun!¡± he giggled to himself. Shortly after, he charged at Kawao. In a split second, Kawao prepared himself, and the two began a fierce and rapid exchange of blows, neither giving the other an inch. Suddenly, Hino jumped far back and swung his right arm. His fingernails grew about half a meter long, turning into razor-sharp claws. This text was taken from Royal Road. Help the author by reading the original version there. He charged at Kawao again. ¡°Hell¡¯s Claw!¡± he shouted, stabbing with all his claws simultaneously. Kawao anticipated this and managed to protect himself with his arms, but the claws still pierced through his skin and muscles. The attack packed a tremendous force, launching him into the sky with a cannon-like bang. High above the city, he prepared for the next imminent attack. Hino quickly flew towards him and swung with another Hell¡¯s Claw. This time, Kawao¡¯s defense was stronger. The claws pierced his skin but did not go deeper. Nevertheless, the impact of the attack sent him flying again. This time, he landed at the docks. Instead of crashing down like a meteorite, he used his gathered energy to slow his fall and roll to safety. As if he had anticipated it, he delivered a powerful roundhouse kick to the approaching Hino. His opponent landed a few meters away and immediately sprang back at him, undeterred by the kick. The two began another fierce duel. They kept blocking each other¡¯s attacks. But to the dock workers watching from afar, it looked like a barrage of cannon fire. 79: Fight of Monsters Slowly, the dock beneath them began to crumble from the shockwaves of their attacks. Shortly thereafter, Kawao managed to hurl his opponent far into the waters off Kurani with a skillful elbow strike. With a massive splash, Hino landed in the water, creating a huge fountain. Without hesitating, Kawao jumped in after him. Hino stood on the water. It began to boil beneath him. He held his stomach. ¡®That hit really landed!¡¯ Through the cascading water, Kawao charged at him and delivered a punch, which was blocked. Nevertheless, Hino was sent flying again. With a loud crash, he slammed into a cliff outside the city. With a malicious grin, he watched as his opponent sped across the water and suddenly jumped at him again. But he easily blocked the next punch with one hand. He gripped his fist tightly. ¡°Not bad! You¡¯re quite entertaining! I guess I should get a bit serious too, right?¡± he said, chuckling, and hurled Kawao with immense force towards the city. If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it. With ease, Kawao landed safely in one of the many streets of the city. But shortly after, Hino attacked him again. This time, he had claws on both hands. And more were slowly growing on his arms. Kawao had no choice but to dodge. ¡®Those claws have insane power!¡¯ The battle continued intensely, while the people in the city panicked and desperately searched for a safe place. Meanwhile, in the Kurani garrison. For a good half hour, the whole city seemed to be in a state of emergency. Makon was initially surprised, then angry, and finally a bit pleased. He immediately knew that Fetu would be behind the chaos that his soldiers were reporting to him. And even if he wasn¡¯t, he would do everything in his power to pin it on him, like any good soldier. Besides, something was finally happening in his city. After about 18 years, the first serious incident! Finally, he could shine since he took this job. He barked orders to his soldiers with complete seriousness. They were to help protect the citizens as best as they could and be ready should one of the two be defeated or if both run out of steam. One of them would end up in jail today. And no matter who it was, he would reap the rewards and stand as the victor. He had no doubts about that. After his men left his office, he turned and took a long, thoughtful look out the window. From his office, he had a perfect view of the city. Like a painting, he always thought. He could no longer contain his anticipation. At the end of the day, he would be in someone¡¯s favor. Be it the army or the emperor. Either was good for him. As he smiled down at the city, Kawao and Hino shot past his window for a split second. Hino reveled like a madman as Kawao charged at him, nearly blind with rage. With a loud crash, the window in Makon¡¯s office shattered. For a moment, he was in a state of shock. Shortly after, he realized how dangerous the situation really was. He immediately set off to end the fight at the next possible opportunity. 80: Finale! Kawao engaged in a rapid chase with his opponent through the labyrinthine streets of Kurani. People fled in panic as the two battled. Hino¡¯s arms were almost completely covered with red claws and spikes. His Hell Claws became more dangerous with each use. Even so, Kawao found it easy to dodge them. But he quickly realized that the fight couldn¡¯t last much longer. He needed to end it before it was too late and he lost any chance of victory. With newfound determination, Kawao went back on the offensive. He effortlessly dodged the attacks and launched a counterattack. Unexpectedly, Hino blocked it with his leg, which was rapidly growing claws and spikes. Kawao had to retreat! But he knew he wouldn¡¯t be allowed to. So he engaged in a deadly close combat with a crazed fire spirit. It became significantly harder to dodge the increasingly fast attacks. Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation. ¡®I need to find an opening!¡¯ Suddenly, spikes grew from Hino¡¯s chest and shot small but powerful fireballs at him. He couldn¡¯t dodge them in time and was hurled through several houses, finally coming to a stop on a balcony railing. But he had no time to rest, as more fireballs soon shot through the smoke from the collapsed buildings. With impressive precision, Kawao dodged them all. However, the house to which the balcony belonged was destroyed. But he didn¡¯t care at the moment. Hino flew directly at him, ready to smash him through the next few blocks. At the last moment, Kawao jumped into the air and watched his opponent crash into the collapsing house. Shortly after, more projectiles shot at him. Again, he managed to dodge them all. Except for one, which sent him crashing back to the ground. With a bang, he landed in the marketplace of Kurani. This was the largest open space in the city. Perfect for ending this. Shortly after, Hino landed a few meters in front of him. With all the spikes and claws growing out of his body, he almost looked like a human hedgehog. ¡°You do not disappoint me! That¡¯s good!¡± ¡°Maybe we should wrap this up.¡± ¡°Why? We¡¯re just getting started!¡± A loud rushing sound was heard. Hino¡¯s claws extended in his direction. With a soft but increasingly loud hiss, they focused their fireballs on a single point. Kawao instantly understood what this meant. ¡®If that thing hits the city, hundreds will die! I have to stop it!¡¯ He focused all his energy into his hands. After a brief moment, Hino fired his deadly fireball. With a tremendous roar, it zoomed towards Kawao, who managed to catch it with his hands at the last moment. But the fire was too strong. With a final burst of energy, he hurled the ball high into the air. He let his energy flow into it as well. The fireball now shimmered somewhat white due to the energy. With his very last bit of strength, Kawao began to control the energy in the ball and sent it back to its sender. Hino was extremely surprised before his own projectile hit him, tearing the entire square apart in an explosion. 81: The Escape An almost impenetrable cloud of dust enveloped the remains of the marketplace. Kawao lay trembling on the ground. He was conscious again. All he felt was pain. Even moving his eyes made them water. But he knew just as well as his broken body that he couldn¡¯t just lie there. He slowly began to gather energy. It hurt. But he ignored the pain. After what felt like an eternity, he managed to stand up. He coughed and almost collapsed again. This time, he had really pushed himself to the limit. But who had taken over his body? The voice sounded familiar. It wasn¡¯t the first time he had heard it. A loud growl interrupted his fleeting thoughts. Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there. Through the dusty veil, he saw a figure. It was Fetu. Despite the massive clash, he had only sustained minor injuries. Yet he still looked extremely tense and angry. ¡°RAAAAARGH! HOW IS THIS POSSIBLE??? ME!!! INJURED??? I couldn¡¯t have imagined this in a hundred years! GRRRR! You¡¯ll pay for this! KAWAOOOO!!!¡± he roared with a bestial voice that sent a chill down Kawao¡¯s spine. For the first time in his life, he was one hundred percent sure he was going to die. But that thought faded as he saw Fetu collapse to the ground, writhing wildly. Was he trying to regain control over his body? Whatever it was, this was his chance to escape! He heard approaching footsteps from all directions. They didn¡¯t sound like normal citizens¡­ Soldiers! He had less time than he thought! Suddenly, he gathered all his energy in his legs and sprinted as fast as he could. Away from Fetu. Away from this battlefield. Away from those who wanted him dead. He quickly reached the edge of the small crater they had caused. A few shocked and terrified citizens stood there, unable to grasp what had happened. He ignored them. With one last burst of strength, he dashed through the streets ahead. Suddenly, he felt dizzy and his vision began to fade. He lost consciousness again. Out of the corner of his eye, he saw an unassuming building with a red cross over the door. ¡®A hospital?¡¯ he thought. He had no time to ponder. With one final effort, he leaped through the door into the building. Then everything went black¡­
Slowly, Finn wrestled back control of his body. Since his body had been taken over by Hino, his Nyd, he had been searching for a way to reclaim it. He didn¡¯t want him to start another massacre. One time had been enough for him. And he couldn¡¯t hope for Pinoir to appear and help him again. But suddenly, as if by shock, he regained control. In front of him stood the tiredly smiling Pinoir. ¡°Are you alright, my friend?¡± he asked, completely out of breath. ¡°How did you¡­¡± Finn began, and then lost consciousness. This battle between Kawao and Finn would later be known as the ¡°Second Tragedy of Kurani.¡± 82: A Dream from the Past An infinite darkness surrounded him. It seemed familiar to him. As if he had found it again after a long or short time. He no longer knew. Here, there was no time and no space. Only him and his innermost and darkest thoughts, or so he thought. A scene began to build around him. Slowly, he realized that he was dreaming again. This didn¡¯t always happen. After most dreams, he couldn¡¯t remember what he had dreamed. But these partly ¡°prophetic¡± dreams were different. As if they were trying to tell him something. The surroundings seemed familiar to him. It was his house. Where he lived with his parents. Slowly, a person formed in front of him out of smoke. It was his father. This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon. He seemed angry. ¡°Why did you do it?¡± he shouted. ¡°Why did you hit him?¡± ¡°Because he spoke badly about you and our family!¡± he suddenly heard himself say. He turned around. Behind him stood his younger self. He remembered this moment. When he was seven years old, he had argued with another boy during training and had fought with him. His father had been very angry with him, but he didn¡¯t know why. He would learn it later. Just as he thought this, the surroundings changed. Now he was on the beach. He watched himself sitting by the water with his father, looking out at the open sea. ¡°My son,¡± his father began. ¡°People are like the sea! They are unfathomable. When you think you know them, they start to show different facets, and you learn new things about them that you couldn¡¯t have even guessed before!¡± He stared thoughtfully at the water. But he was still very focused on this conversation. ¡°Do you know why I was angry with you?¡± He hesitated briefly and then replied, ¡°No. I don¡¯t understand!¡± His father waited a moment. He let the evening sea breeze blow across his face. He looked down at him. ¡°Do you think he is a bad person?¡± ¡°Yes! He insulted us! He humiliated us publicly!¡± ¡°Do you know why he did it?¡± ¡°Because he is fundamentally bad!¡± His father took a deep breath and sighed deeply. ¡°My son! You are good at many things, but even you will never be able to do and understand everything! ¡­ This boy is an orphan. His mother died shortly after his birth, and his father beat him for a long time until it was noticed,¡± he began. His younger self slowly turned pale. ¡°You seem to slowly understand. He didn¡¯t insult our family because he is fundamentally evil. No one is! He probably did it out of envy. He envies you and your talent. Your healthy family. Your¡­ better life. He probably felt provoked by you. That¡¯s why he did what he did. And that¡¯s why you shouldn¡¯t judge others immediately by their actions. At least not until you know the background of their actions! Do you understand what I¡¯m trying to tell you?¡± ¡°I¡­ I think so.¡± ¡°Good! Then show me. Make peace with him! Try to get to know him! Then you will see that no person is fundamentally bad or does evil things always for evil reasons! Show me that you can become a responsible person!¡± ¡°Yes, Father!¡± 83: A possible Future! The memory of this scene made him happy. But also thoughtful. What his father had told him back then was true. One should not judge others by their actions. These words he had almost forgotten. But how was he supposed to apply them in his current situation? Although he didn¡¯t know the reason why his homeland was attacked, the attackers were dead. He could no longer ask them for the reason. Likewise, everyone else in the Kasakan army saw him as an enemy and wanted to see him either in prison or dead. And even if he did find the reason¡­ Would he be able to forgive? This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version. Or see them in a different light? ¡­ ¡°No! I don¡¯t think so!¡± he thought. He knew that in his heart he would never find forgiveness for them. ¡­ But maybe not every one of them was responsible! They were only following orders. And perhaps they didn¡¯t even know the background. The ordinary soldiers were almost innocent in his eyes. But those who gave the orders¡­ For them, there would only be death! No matter what reason they had. His family needed a scapegoat! Someone who would feel this anger! But from now on, no one should die senselessly! He was glad that he had gained this insight. Now he felt better. The surroundings blurred again. Was he waking up now? ¡­ No! Slowly, a dark, destroyed environment formed around him. It seemed unfamiliar to him. Slowly, it brightened. He stood in the middle of a war-torn city. All around him, he could see blood and corpses. But nothing he saw seemed familiar. A loud rumble caught his attention. He noticed that the city was surrounded by a series of volcanoes, all erupting simultaneously. ¡°What happened here?¡± he wondered. In the distance, he could just barely make out a huge building, which shortly thereafter collapsed in parts. ¡°This is the future if you stay on your path of revenge!¡± he heard a voice in his head. Shortly afterward, everything went black before his eyes, and he slowly began to wake up. Unaware that he would forget this last part of his dream again. 84: Horrible Awakening ¡°I¡­ think¡­ awake.¡± Slowly but surely, Kawao regained control of his senses. Carefully, he opened his eyes. A bright light blinded him. He needed a moment to get used to it. ¡°What¡­ doing?¡± he heard again. ¡°Who is speaking?¡± he asked. But there was no answer. He tried to sit up, but his body felt heavy. After the fight he had some time ago, that was no wonder. But he had the feeling that he was getting better by the minute. Stolen novel; please report. After about five minutes, he managed to sit up and take a blurry look at his surroundings. He was sitting on a table. Had he been operated on? Was he in a hospital? He could see two figures nearby. ¡°Where am I?¡± he asked them slowly. They turned to him. After a brief pause, they answered, ¡°You are safe!¡± He could hear a female, familiar voice. But he didn¡¯t care about that at the moment. The only thing that interested him was that he was in control of his senses again. And after a short time, he could perceive more details of his surroundings. He was in a very clean-looking white room. Nearby stood a small table with medical-looking instruments. However, he still couldn¡¯t recognize the two figures, as they were standing in a dark corner. He didn¡¯t notice that although the room was fully lit, there was a very darkened corner. Slowly, he began to understand. After the fight, he had probably managed to escape to some kind of hospital and had luckily been rescued there. He was sure that if he hadn¡¯t received help, he would have died sooner or later. ¡°Did you help me? Thank you very much! I owe you one. Can I do anything for you?¡± he asked. The two figures slowly stepped into the light. ¡°Well, you can do something for us!¡± said the woman. A cold shiver ran down his spine as he saw and recognized them. They were the nun and the bishop of Isulon! The nun grinned broadly at him. ¡°You can come with us!¡± 85: The Hospital Kawao immediately recoiled and fell off the table. With a serious, piercing gaze, he looked at the two members of the Church of Madness. The nun grinned at him darkly. "Where are you planning to take me?" he asked. "Back to your beastly boss?" "Beastly? How dare you insult his Holine¡ª" the nun began. "Calm down, Kunojo! Now is not the time for that!" the bishop interrupted her. He returned Kawao''s stare. "It¡¯s not necessarily our task to take him. He has to want it himself." He sighed and walked towards him. If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement. "You¡¯re probably confused, especially after our last meeting... But don''t worry! We mean you no harm. Our mission was to heal your wounds and, if we can convince you, to take you with us." "And where to?" Kawao asked again. "To our headquarters! Our master has taken a great interest in you." Kawao paused for a moment. After his first encounter with their boss, he knew immediately that these people had nothing good in mind. He knew what he had to do. "Well. Thanks for healing me, but I have no interest in joining your asylum!" he said calmly and then, with an energy-charged leap, dashed through the door leading out of the room. The two calmly watched him go. "This is pointless! I¡¯ll knock him out and then we¡¯ll take him!" Kunojo said, following after him. The bishop tried to stop her, but she was already gone. He sighed again. In a rush, Kawao sprinted through the brightly lit and clean hospital corridors. ''I can''t get caught! Where''s the exit?'' he thought as he rounded a corner and bumped into someone. Both of them fell to the ground. Kawao immediately got back up and quickly tried to help the other person up. "Sorry! Are you alri...?" Suddenly, his face went pale. In front of him lay a skeleton cloaked in a robe. It turned toward him. In its eye sockets, small orange flames flickered. "It''s all good," the skeleton responded. "Nothing happened." 86: The Pursuit The skeleton stood up and bowed to him before continuing on its way, as if nothing had happened. Although Kawao was shocked, he noticed its clothing. It was wearing the same cloak as Kunojo and the bishop! He recognized it by the strange triangular symbol, which he had already seen on the others. Until now, he hadn''t had the time to examine it closely, but he would recognize it anywhere. He followed the skeleton and placed his hand on its bony shoulder. "Wait a moment!" he called out. The skeleton turned around again. "Hm?" At that moment, a sharp object whizzed just past Kawao''s nose and embedded itself in the wall next to him. It was a small blade! Kunojo had found him! "Get to safety, Reaper!" she said calmly, as she slowly approached the two of them. The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. "Alright!" Without hesitation, the Reaper ran off. "Hey, wait!" Kawao shouted after him and began to chase him again. "And why are you chasing him? Want to thank him for healing you?" Kunojo was now truly annoyed as she pursued the two. "Healed? HE healed me?" "Well, who do you think else has a Nyd capable of healing such wounds?" "How would I know? I don¡¯t even know your Nyds!" "You''re really starting to get on my nerves! Well, now I just want to fight you even more!" she yelled, throwing more knives at him. But Kawao was prepared! He had drawn a fine energy field around himself to sense attacks in time. However, he hadn¡¯t yet mastered the technique well enough, so he could only react instinctively when one of the knives penetrated the field. Still, it was enough for him to dodge effortlessly while running. "You¡¯ve learned since our last encounter! I like that. Well, I guess I¡¯ll have to take this a bit more seriously, right?" Suddenly, he felt a long, sharp object pierce his field. Thanks to a quick sidestep, he managed to dodge. But he collided with a wall and had to stop, which the Reaper used to escape out of his reach. ''What was that?'' he wondered. His question would soon be answered. When he glanced at his pursuer, he immediately knew what had attacked him. A long, sharp, insectoid arm covered in blades had grown from Kunojo¡¯s back. And three more were slowly sprouting. "Now I¡¯ve got your attention!" "What the hell are you?" "I¡¯m a hunting nun who has just found her prey!" she said gleefully, licking her lips. 87: Kawao vs. Kunojo Kawao didn¡¯t know what to make of it. He had never thought there were Nyds that could cause such mutations. But while he was still stumbling back in surprise, Kunojo attacked him again with the claws on her back. Only thanks to his quick reaction and energy field was he able to dodge in time. "Oh? Well, let¡¯s see how long you can keep that up!" Suddenly, all her claws attacked at once, turning the corridor into a dense storm of blades. But Kawao had prepared. Ever since he had been chasing the Reaper, he had been gathering energy from his surroundings, readying himself for just such a battle. With extraordinary precision, he dodged every attack as his opponent became more and more consumed by the fight. ''I can dodge, but that won¡¯t get me anywhere! If I try to run again, she¡¯ll attack, and it¡¯ll be harder for me to evade. The risk is too great! I have to fight!'' he decided, continuing to gather strength. Then, after a short while, he saw an opening in her attacks. He took it and charged forward. In an instant, he gathered all the energy he had into his fist and delivered a powerful punch to her gut. A small shockwave rippled out. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. ''Did I do it?'' he wondered. But at that moment, he felt his answer. Whatever he hit was hard. Extremely hard! He felt something warm on his fist. Blood! His blood! "Nice try! But it¡¯ll take more than that to bring me down," she whispered to him, as saliva slowly dripped from her mouth and landed on his outstretched arm. ''Damn! What do I do now?'' At that moment, the ground beneath him gave way. A hole had opened up beneath them. As he began to fall, he caught sight of the bishop, who waved at him with a tired smile. Kunojo held herself up with her claws over the hole, watching him fall. "Ugh! Why did you have to stop the fight, Ultis? It was just starting to get fun!" she replied, annoyed. "You know what happens when you ¡®play¡¯ with your opponents, Kunojo. And our master wants him alive, not as one of your mindless puppets." Reluctantly and pouting, she followed him.
Kawao, still falling, overheard fragments of their conversation. The only useful thing he caught was the bishop¡¯s name: Ultis. He landed safely on the lower floor. It was very dark here. Coming from the bright light above, he needed a moment to adjust to the darkness. But after a short while, he could make out something. Were those... bones? Yes! Scattered throughout the hallway were bones. And it looked like no one had lived here for years. ''What is this? I thought I was in a hospital?'' He looked around in horror. Suddenly, he saw a beam of light. At the far end of the hallway, there was a boarded-up window. ''I need to get out of here!'' Without looking back, he ran toward the window and leaped. With a loud crash and the sound of splintering wood, he broke through the window and landed safely on the open street. People were here again. He was safe! He turned to look at the building. Whatever he had thought was there, it wasn¡¯t. Because the only thing standing there was a small, rundown shed with a now broken window. 88: Reunion He had no idea what was happening to him. It was just like back on Isulon, when he had first encountered the two. What had seemed like a secure, well-maintained building turned out to be a dilapidated wreck in reality. ''How do they do that? How is this possible? I really need to stay away from this church!'' he thought briefly, panicking. He took a deep breath and tried to calm himself down. At least he tried. Ever since he had arrived in Kurani, events had been spiraling out of control. ''The rebellion! Fetu! The church! What¡¯s next?'' He looked around. The people around him seemed nervous and somewhat frightened. Understandable, considering he had just jumped out of a window with no explanation. Shortly after, they began murmuring and pointing at him. Kawao took a closer look at the people around him. Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. They were scared. They feared him and quickly began to distance themselves from him. ''Do they know I fought Fetu and caused damage to the city?'' he wondered. But more than that, he wanted to know where he was now. It was still his first time in Kurani, and it was a large city. Suddenly, he heard something coming from down the street. Was that¡­ footsteps? Yes! Someone was approaching him. He quickly spotted a figure cloaked in a hood, their face hidden beneath it, walking directly towards him. Next to them was another person. They looked familiar. Was that... Koru? Why was he with this mysterious figure? And why were they running? Moments later, he saw that they were being chased by a group of soldiers. Kawao immediately got into a fighting stance. ''It¡¯s probably best if I take out their pursuers!'' he thought. "Is that him?" the hooded figure suddenly called out to Koru. Koru looked at Kawao and replied, "Yes! That¡¯s him!" "Good! HEY, YOU! BIRD BRAIN! FOLLOW US!" the figure shouted at him. "Why? I could just knock out your pursuers!" "ARE YOU COMPLETELY STUPID?!" They didn¡¯t slow down. Kawao wanted to stand his ground and fight off the pursuers, but the hooded figure grabbed him by the collar and started dragging him along behind them. "Hey! What¡¯s the big idea?" "What¡¯s the big idea? I¡¯m here to help you, you morons! Now start running, or I¡¯ll turn you into mince meat later!" 89: Shake off Kawao quickly broke free and started running after the two. "If you''re not going to tell me why we shouldn''t fight them, at least tell me where we''re running to!" "Are you stupid? If I tell you that now, they''ll hear it too. Just follow me!" Together, they ran down the street, closely followed by the soldiers. "Catch them!" "Don¡¯t let them escape!" the soldiers yelled after them. Suddenly, their rescuer took a sharp turn to the right. They followed her and quickly found themselves in a small labyrinth of narrow, winding alleyways, through which they darted with purpose. Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work! Left, right, right, left, straight ahead! Over time, the sound of the soldiers'' footsteps and shouts grew fainter. They had been running for what felt like an eternity until they reached a small, unremarkable house squeezed between two larger ones. Together, they stormed inside, startling the two elderly residents. But after their rescuer quickly whispered a few words to the residents, words that Kawao couldn¡¯t understand, they nodded in agreement and turned around. They moved aside a large old rug that covered almost the entire floor, revealing a hidden door underneath. Once the door was opened, the three of them hurried inside, and they heard the door close behind them. "SHHH! Be quiet now!" their rescuer whispered to them, holding her hands over their mouths. The two did as they were told, staying silent and waiting. After a while, they heard the footsteps of the soldiers again. They were searching the area! It seemed like the soldiers were asking the locals if they had seen them. ''Hopefully, the old folks won¡¯t give us away!'' Kawao thought to himself. They could hear the residents talking with the soldiers but couldn¡¯t make out what was being said. After a short while, the voices and footsteps gradually faded. They were safe! 90: The Escape Plan They slowly took deep, relieved breaths. The soldiers had lost their trail. Once they had calmed down, Kawao spoke, "Who are you anyway?" "You¡¯ll find out soon enough! Just follow me for now," she replied, motioning for them to follow. They walked down a dark, narrow hallway until they reached a small but sturdy door. Without hesitation, their rescuer opened it. They entered a room that was surprisingly larger than they had expected. It was well-lit by a few small torches and contained a table with four chairs in the center. The room offered little else, resembling a small secret hideout. "This is a hideout provided by supporters of the rebellion. There aren¡¯t many willing to risk their lives and help us. But those who do are more than heroes¡ªthey are legends!" she explained as she sat down at the table across from them. She pulled back her hood and looked at them seriously. She had short blonde hair and many scars on her face, making her seem like someone who had seen many battles, Kawao thought. "And now explain to me..." she continued. "WHY YOU CAUSED SUCH A RUCKUS!!! I was sent here to get you out of the city. No problem, right? I go in, find you, and we sneak out! Simple, right? And what do I see the moment I enter the city? THIS PLACE IS IN WORSE CHAOS THAN THE LAST WAR!!! Honestly! You were supposed to keep a low profile, not destroy half the city!" The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. She shouted with such force that they almost toppled over. "Koru, you at least tried to keep things quiet. But you, ''Kawao,'' thought it was a great idea to get into a brawl with the commander of the 5th unit! Wasn¡¯t Paikon enough for you?" "You did WHAT?" Koru exclaimed. "It just happened! He figured me out quickly, and I couldn¡¯t escape!" "And so, you decided to turn half the city into a battlefield in your fight with him, right? Makes perfect sense!" "It happened, and I¡¯m sorry! I can¡¯t change that! But how are we supposed to get out of the city now without the army being on our tail in five minutes?" Their rescuer took a deep breath, visibly irritated. "Don¡¯t worry! I¡¯ve already got a plan for that! So listen carefully because I¡¯m only going to explain it once!" The two nodded, a bit nervously. "First, I¡¯ll explain the route to the gate that leads out of the city. Since Kurani is surrounded by a small mountain range, that¡¯s the only exit! Once you¡¯re on your way, I¡¯ll run to the garrison and create a... ¡®distraction.¡¯ That should ensure you reach the gate without any problems. That¡¯s the first part of the plan! Got it so far?" They nodded again. "Good! When you reach the gate, wait for me there. Once we¡¯ve met at the gate, I¡¯ll guide you through the border control and out of the city to a nearby hidden base of our rebellion. If we stick to this, we should have no problems! Did you understand everything?" Koru slowly replied, "Pretty much. But are you seriously going to attack the garrison all by yourself? You can¡¯t possibly do that!" "Don¡¯t worry! I¡¯ll manage. I¡¯m just creating a little distraction." "But there are bound to be two or three commanders waiting for you!" "So what?" "So what? Do you even know what you¡¯re saying?" "You¡¯re underestimating me. But no need to worry. I was once a commander in the army too." "Oh yeah? Which unit?" "The First." 91: Attack on the Garrison, Part 1 Cautiously, Kawao and Koru walked through the streets of Kurani. They tried to move unnoticed, blending into the crowd. It was clear from the looks on people''s faces that they were afraid. But there was more. Anger! They were furious. Kawao couldn¡¯t blame them. After all, it was him who had destroyed half the city during his fight. He wanted to apologize and try to make it right, but that would only get them into even more trouble right now. Not to mention all the soldiers patrolling the city, searching for them. But what worried him most was their rescuer. She hadn¡¯t told them her name, saying she wouldn¡¯t reveal it until they had left the city. And she had gone to the Kurani garrison alone. He was a bit concerned.
Meanwhile, outside the garrison: "You¡¯re supposed to protect us from things like this!" "That¡¯s why we pay taxes!" "Do something already!" Filled with anger and frustration, large crowds had gathered in front of the army headquarters in Kurani to express their disappointment. The soldiers had managed to close the gates just in time, preventing anyone from entering the premises. This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. From his office on the second floor, Makon observed the situation. ''How did it come to this?'' he asked himself, irritated as he looked at the crowd. ''Why did that bastard cause such an uproar here? He¡¯s going to regret it when he wakes up!'' Fetu had lost consciousness shortly after the fight and had been lying in his room at the garrison ever since. Makon would have loved nothing more than to throw Fetu to the crowd, to watch as they figuratively tore him apart. He sighed heavily. Now he had to figure out how to clean up this mess. At that moment, a window to his left shattered. Surprised and enraged, he turned around. ''Are they throwing stones now?'' But it wasn¡¯t a stone. Kneeling before him was a cloaked figure, looking at him sharply from the side. "Who are y¡ª?" he began, but before he could finish, he was thrown with tremendous force through the wall behind him. A long, intricately designed staff made of pure flames extended from the figure¡¯s hand, pressing against the now prone Makon. With a sweeping motion, the staff vanished, and the figure stood up. Outside, frightened and still angry shouts could be heard. With a jolt, Makon got back on his feet. "Are you the one who fought Fet¡ª?" he started again, before another staff sent him crashing through three more walls. The figure now turned toward the door leading out of Makon¡¯s office, behind which the sound of many approaching footsteps could be heard. "Time to get to work!" the figure said and set off. 92: Attack on the Garrison, Part 2 The people protesting in front of the garrison panicked when they saw Makon being thrown through the walls. Some began to flee, while others continued to hurl insults. But over time, the protest turned into a full-scale uprising, which was no longer confined to the entrance of the garrison and would soon spread to the rest of the premises. Meanwhile, the mysterious figure continued running through the garrison, knocking out everyone in sight with strikes from a fiery staff. ''It should be somewhere around here!'' she thought, looking around. She was searching for the mechanism that controlled the gates of the garrison. The mechanism could only be activated by a Fire-Nyd user, but too much heat could also destroy it. This had already happened once before, during the last War of the Lost, when a great battle raged in the city. Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon. Some assassins had snuck in and destroyed the mechanism to allow their allies to launch an attack on the garrison, which at the time was primarily caring for the wounded. What followed was a gruesome massacre, where friend and foe could no longer be distinguished. All the survivors have since been left with traumatic memories to process. But now wasn¡¯t the time to dwell on the past. With a bang, the figure kicked down the door in front of her, believing the room with the mechanism was inside. But it wasn¡¯t. She had entered the infirmary. ''They must have rebuilt the garrison since then!'' But that was the least of her worries. In front of her stood two men beside a bed. She recognized one of them all too well. He was tall and broad, but his face was narrow. His long, greasy hair, which he slicked back three times a day with hair gel, hung from his shoulders like a black cloak, blending with the dark red of his actual cloak into a dark omen for anyone unfortunate enough to lay eyes on him. He slowly looked up at her with a puzzled expression. "How dare you break in here as if this place belongs to you?" he said slowly. Before her stood the figure of the current commander of the 1st unit, Feratu. He was also known as "The Walking Wilderness." 93: Attack on the Garrison, Part 3 Slowly, Finn woke up from his dream. The world around him came into focus, blurry at first, as his consciousness returned. He was lying on a bed. He couldn¡¯t move. He heard voices. "But he can¡¯t control it!" "I don¡¯t care! That bastard is going to be kicked out of the army as soon as possible, and then I¡¯ll execute him myself!" "That¡¯s going too far!" "What was that?" Slowly, Finn tried to sit up. With a soft groan, he moved his limbs. The two voices stopped talking. "Ah! He¡¯s..." "Well, look who¡¯s finally awake!" one voice said, and suddenly, a sharp, piercing pain shot through him. In an instant, he was wide awake. The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. He let out a soft cry and now recognized the two people standing by his bed, the owners of the voices he had heard. One belonged to Pinoir, the commander of the 10th unit, who had saved him earlier. The other matched Feratu, the commander of the 1st unit, who was pressing his fist hard into Finn¡¯s chest, which was covered in bandages. "You¡¯ve got some nerve waking up right now, you little bastard!" Feratu began, but was interrupted by Pinoir. "Now¡¯s not the time to interrogate him! He just woke up. We should give him a moment to recover!" But Feratu shoved Pinoir aside, like pushing away a beggar in the night. "Why wait? He¡¯s awake now! He can answer our questions just as well!" he said casually, looking at Finn with a contemptuous smile. "So..." he continued, pressing his fist harder, making Finn suppress his cries of pain. "Why did you destroy half of Kurani, you filthy little treacherous scum? Hmmm?!" "Fo... Found! I had... HNGH! I found him!" "Found? Who?" "The one the Emperor is searching for! Hah! At first, I didn¡¯t think he existed, but then... he was there! In that tavern! We fought! He was... stronger than I thought. I lost control!... That¡¯s all I remember!" For a moment, there was silence, except for the distant clattering and rumbling, which no one seemed to notice. "And we¡¯re supposed to believe that!" Feratu shouted, slamming his fist into Finn¡¯s chest with a loud crack. Finn let out another scream of pain. "Stop it, you¡¯re going to..." Pinoir began, but was cut off as the door to the infirmary was kicked open with a loud bang. A figure, cloaked in a long coat, entered the room. 94: Attack on the Garrison, Part 4 Feratu and the figure stared at each other intensely. He took a slow, deep breath and closed his eyes. "I¡¯ll give you a moment to explain yourself, because when I open my eyes again, you¡¯ll be dead! Understood?" he stated in a surprisingly calm voice. Immediately after, the figure kicked him square in the face, sending him flying back into a row of empty beds. Pinoir flinched, instinctively realizing that this person was physically far superior to him. Feratu got up slowly, now with a smile on his face. "Pinoir! Get out of here! This one¡¯s too much for you!" Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author. "Understood!" Pinoir replied, quickly making his exit. "Alright, now it¡¯s just the two of us, kid!" "Kid?" "Huh?" The figure took off her cloak, revealing Kawao and Koru¡¯s rescuer, glaring at Feratu. "I¡¯m a woman, you bastard!" Feratu looked visibly surprised but quickly regained his composure. "Ah. Now I understand! You¡¯re the one! That explains a few things! I thought you were dead?" "As long as you¡¯re alive, I¡¯ll never die!" "Oh, really? Let¡¯s see about that! Zenso, the Staff Acrobat!" "You will pay today! Feratu, the Walking Wilderness!" Both charged at each other, enraged, and soon fell into a rapid exchange of blows. The sheer force of their strikes shattered the windows in no time. But after about two minutes, they both stopped fighting. "This is pointless! We could punch each other all day, but that won¡¯t determine a winner!" "You¡¯re right! Let¡¯s go all out right from the start!" With that, both activated their Nyd. The real battle was just beginning. 95: Attack on the Garrison, Part 5 A blazing hot aura surrounded Feratu. His hair turned a glowing white and grew down to his hips. Claw-like auras formed around his hands and feet, and he appeared larger. "Flame Circus: Lion!" he called this form. On the other side, Zenso took a deep breath and raised her arms. With a circular motion, she summoned multiple fire staffs that now floated in a circle around her. "Burning Martial Arts: Staff Dance!" she named her technique. For a moment, both waited. Then Feratu attacked. With lightning-fast speed, he launched a strike. But Zenso evaded it with an acrobatic maneuver using her staffs and delivered a kick to his face. She could control the staffs she created with simple hand movements. Additionally, the staffs could hover in midair during this technique, allowing her to use them for various evasive actions. Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit. Feratu, however, used the momentum from her kick to spin and launch an even faster strike at her while she was still in the air. But once again, she managed to dodge using her staffs and flexibility. She landed safely behind him and, with several movements, summoned her staffs again. Just as he turned around, she sent the staffs speeding toward him. One after another, they struck him all over his body. It looked like a barrage of staff blows, hitting him with considerable force and sending him crashing through a wall. With more gestures, she summoned even more staffs and launched them at Feratu, whom she couldn¡¯t clearly see through the dust cloud in the rubble. There was a loud crash. And then, a shadow rose. Slowly, Feratu stepped out of the dust. He had suffered hardly any injuries. Her staffs had barely affected him. "Is that all you¡¯ve got? I thought you¡¯d have at least trained a little since our last fight," he said, disappointed. "Oh, don¡¯t worry. I¡¯ve trained! Enough to make you pay!" she responded. The fight continued. Meanwhile, Kawao and Koru were nearing the gates of Kurani. At the same time, a large dark shadow was approaching Kurani from the north. 96: Escape from Kurani Part 1 In the shadow of the mountains, the two reached the gate of Kurani. It was a massive gate carved into the rock, though open at the top. ''Maybe we could just jump over it? No, that would be too obvious.'' The gate itself was several meters thick and could be sealed with a steel grate. In front of the gate was a small plaza, where many soldiers were patrolling. During the Third War of the Lost, the city was attacked from two sides¡ªby sea and through the gate. For a long time, no one dared attack the city due to its strategic trade routes and its ideal location as a fortress. But eventually, two nations united and attempted the attack. The valley quickly turned into a battlefield, burning like a torch and spilling blood into the sea. This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. At that time, the attack was barely repelled by a group of admirals and commanders from Kasaka, along with the help of various mercenary groups. The battle left a deep scar on the land and its people, from which they took a long time to recover. Thanks to a former admiral, the gate was fully restored, as was the city. But the sea in front of Kurani remained red with blood for days. For a time, the city was even called "The City by the Red Sea." Now, only a few signs remained of the destruction from those days. In honor of the admiral, a statue had been erected in the plaza. However, in recent years, under the new emperor, the statue had been removed. Now, only an impressive mosaic on the ground commemorated the history of that battle. Kawao suspected that the mosaic must be telling the story of the battle that Kenzo had told them about. They looked around, but there was no sign of their rescuer. They began to worry. What if the plan had failed? Could they escape on their own? Shortly afterward, they heard a faint but increasingly loud whistling. Suddenly, their rescuer landed in front of them. She had several minor injuries and was breathing heavily. She was even bleeding! "Good, you¡¯re here! Let¡¯s go!" she said. 97: Escape from Kurani Part 2 She quickly turned around and surveyed the plaza. Some soldiers had noticed them but weren¡¯t yet sure who they were. "We have to hurry!" she told the two. "Hold onto me somewhere! We''re breaking through quickly!" Kawao and Koru weren¡¯t entirely sure what she meant, but they did as she said for now. Suddenly, she propelled herself and the two into the air by creating flaming staffs beneath her feet and left hand. They were now high enough to see over the gate into the dark valley beyond. In the distance, they could glimpse the glimmer of their freedom. "It won¡¯t be that easy after all!" she warned them. A figure appeared on top of the gate. It was Makon, the commander of the 17th unit. He still bore some injuries from Kenzo''s earlier attack. Recognizing their plan immediately, he had rushed to the gate as quickly as possible. "You thought you could just escape, didn¡¯t you? This is the only place around Kurani where you can leave the city on foot. Everywhere else, the mountains are too high for you to sling yourself over with your staffs!" You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author. "Unfortunately, that¡¯s true," she admitted. "But now, even your last hope is gone!" he shouted at them, throwing his arms wide. A massive wall of flames appeared over the gate. "Close the gates!" he commanded the guards. "But, sir! There are still civilians in the passage!" "Close! The! Gates!" The guards hesitated at first but then followed his orders. With a loud crash, the iron grate slammed down, crushing a few civilians in the process. "As long as I catch you, small sacrifices are acceptable!" he sneered, looking back up at them. Kenzo let her staffs disappear and quickly conjured new ones. This time, however, they weren¡¯t anchored to the ground but to the walls of the nearby buildings. Makon immediately understood what she was planning. With another wave of his arms, he created another wall of searing flames, this time directly in front of him. "I won¡¯t let you through!" he called out, determined. Kenzo rushed toward the massive walls of flame, carrying Kawao and Koru without fear. Koru closed his eyes. Kawao, on the other hand, watched the situation closely and began preparing to gather energy. But just a few meters before the wall, Kenzo extended her right hand, and multiple staffs erupted from it at once. Instead of growing straight out, branches sprouted from the sides of the staffs like tree limbs. Effortlessly, the staffs pierced through the first wall and unleashed a barrage of strikes on Makon, who didn¡¯t have time to defend himself. Dozens of staffs hit him, knocking him unconscious within seconds. With that, both walls of flame crumbled, and the three of them made it safely to the other side. 98: Escape from Kurani Part 3 For a moment, they were able to catch their breath. But Kawao and Koru were still quite shocked by what had just happened. Kawao, in particular, was curious about Kenzo¡¯s technique. "What did you just do? With your staffs? Was that your Nyd?" She glanced over at him briefly. "Yes. When you use your Nyd at 100%, you can unlock its full potential. I¡¯m sure you¡¯ve already seen it with Fetu." Now that he thought about it, it dawned on him. When Fetu had transformed into that thing, it must have been his full power! But it seemed he couldn¡¯t control it. Just like Kawao... . He also suspected that when he fought Paikon, Paikon had also used his full strength¡ªwhen he connected his fire ropes with his body. That must have been it! Suddenly, something caught their attention. A massive cloud of dust appeared before them. ''How did we not notice that?'' "Damn! I was hoping to avoid this!" Kenzo said. "What do you mean?" Kawao asked. "The worst possible situation has occurred!" Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. Before their eyes, a massive army was moving through the valley directly toward them. Their uniforms immediately gave away that they were from the Kasaka army. But that wasn¡¯t the worst part. They were surrounded on all sides. "And some commanders are with them!" Kenzo pointed to several distinct figures. A serious-looking, unassuming soldier. "Commander of the 20th Unit: Funo, the Immortal!" A tall figure almost hidden in the crowd, wrapped in various camouflaging garments. "Commander of the 19th Unit: Ertio, Assassin of the Shadows!" A large, muscular man, proudly displaying his bare chest. "Commander of the 18th Unit: Verbo, Protector of Crucrax!" A woman with a dark, ominous presence, her face obscured by her long, dark hair. "Commander of the 13th Unit: Jack, the Storm of Devastation!" A limping man almost entirely wrapped in bandages. "Commander of the 9th Unit: Sankesh, the Burning Plague!" And a woman dressed in a deep, dark red cloak, who looked eager for battle. "Commander of the 6th Unit: Rando, the Arsenal!" Six commanders were approaching with an army through the valley. "The odds are against us, but I have a plan! So listen carefully!" Kenzo said, quickly leaning in to explain the plan to the two of them. Verbo was the first to spot the trio. "Hm? Are those the three who caused all the commotion?" "Seems like it!" Rando added. "Then let¡¯s get them!" Ertio finished, raising his hands. In the next moment, massive clouds of smoke erupted from his hands, filling the valley. Through the smoke, Verbo spotted two fire staffs leading in opposite directions toward the valley walls. ''They¡¯re trying to confuse us? Which way did they go? I say... THAT way!'' With a powerful leap, he rushed toward the left wall and struck with immense force. But aside from rocks, he hit nothing. His blow nearly caused a landslide. He had chosen wrong. The smoke slowly cleared, and he turned around. On the other side stood Kenzo, alone! Behind her was Ertio, holding a knife to her throat. "I don¡¯t know where the other two went... But you¡¯re as good as dead!" 99: Escape from Kurani Part 4 "Oh, you think it¡¯s already over?" Kenzo asked, before freeing herself from Ertio¡¯s grip with a freshly conjured fire staff. Ertio angrily retreated and vanished into the crowd of soldiers. With a second staff in hand, Kenzo prepared for a prolonged battle. She had a plan. But to execute it, she had to wait for something specific. It could happen quickly or take longer, but either way, she knew she was in for a tough fight. And she understood that the longer the fight went on, the harder it would be for her to survive. Meanwhile, back in Kurani... Kinzo and Bethany had closed their shop some time ago. Now, they sat in the storage room, hoping that this day would end soon and that they wouldn¡¯t be hunted down and arrested by the army. Were their decisions right or wrong? They asked themselves this more than ever, but couldn¡¯t find an answer. Soon, a new day would begin. Whether it would bring hope or despair was still uncertain.
Ultis and Kuno were on their way to meet their master at an unknown location. If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. Although Ultis was satisfied with the outcome of their mission, Kuno couldn¡¯t swallow her frustration at not being able to fight Kawao any longer. But she would get over it. After all, they would meet again soon.
In the garrison, Finn was being beaten by Feratu. Feratu had dragged him to a quiet corner and stained his fists red with Finn¡¯s blood. There was no one to help him. But Finn was used to it. He endured it like every other time. Only this time, he would likely be demoted or even dishonorably discharged. He always expected the worst. Pinoir stood out of sight, behind a corner, listening to the "punishment." He wanted to help Finn but knew what would happen to him if he did. After a while, Pinoir left the scene and let Feratu continue to "blow off steam." Outside the city gates... Only ten minutes had passed. But Kenzo already had multiple bleeding wounds and was struggling to breathe. Yet, she was still standing. She was strong, but the sheer number of enemies and the unsuitable battlefield were huge disadvantages. Moreover, her enemies knew how to fight as a team. She wouldn¡¯t last much longer. "Let¡¯s finish her off and present her to the emperor!" Ertio announced, summoning his smoke once again. This was what Kenzo had been waiting for. At that moment, all five remaining commanders charged at her. With a tremendous bang, the battle came to an end. When the smoke cleared after a while, Kenzo was nowhere to be seen. She had escaped! Unlike the soldiers, the commanders weren¡¯t surprised. If the other two had managed to escape, why shouldn¡¯t she be able to do the same? They ordered their men to enter the city and search for them, while they and a few soldiers inspected the gorge more closely. Only Ertio remained behind as the others hurried. "And so ends the ''Kurani Incident''," he said to the empty air, before disappearing into the crowd. 100: The Council of the Eternal Flame Kawao and Koru now found themselves in a long, dark tunnel. Just moments ago, they had been with Kenzo in front of the gate to Kurani. But when a sudden wall of fog enveloped them, everything went dark, and now they were here. Kenzo had whispered to them just before, telling them to run quickly through the tunnel. Once they reached the end, they would be safe. The two were unsure of what awaited them, or if Kenzo was even okay, but they pressed on, growing faster as they went. After a few minutes, they heard a crackling sound behind them, like stones being moved. They turned around. A small light had appeared at the end of the tunnel. After a moment, they realized it was moving toward them. They braced themselves for a fight. If someone had found this hideout, they would have to silence them. But soon they saw who it was¡ªKenzo! She was using a self-created fire staff to support herself, limping toward them. When she saw the two of them, she gave a tired smile. "I thought you''d be farther along by now," she said in a trembling voice. Moments later, she almost collapsed. "AH!" They quickly helped her up and hurried along. Whoever was at the end of the tunnel would surely be able to help her. Kenzo knew the risks of her plan and wouldn''t have risked her life just for a couple of strangers.
After a while, they arrived in a large cavern. All around them were tables, chairs, blackboards, and cabinets. People were rushing around like in a chaotic marketplace, sending countless papers flying through the air. The atmosphere was filled with loud shouting and heated arguments. They tried to ask someone for help, but they were skillfully ignored. Kenzo had lost consciousness by now. "HEY! THERE YOU ARE AT LAST!" someone suddenly yelled over the noise. They looked around but couldn¡¯t see where the voice had come from. Then, a small, elderly man squeezed his way through the crowd toward them. It was Sid! The homeless man who had led them to Kinzo¡¯s shop. If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it. "Sid! You¡¯re here? Never mind that! We need to help her!" Koru quickly replied, pointing to Kenzo. "Kenzo? What happened to you? We need to get her treated quickly!" He snapped his fingers, and two people immediately arrived to take her off their hands. Kawao and Koru watched her go with concern. "Will she make it?" "Don¡¯t worry, she¡¯s tough! She¡¯ll survive. You two should rest for now." "Are you sure? Can¡¯t we help somehow? We promised we would." "You did? Hm... That¡¯s good, but you can¡¯t help here. I¡¯ll have you taken to some rooms to rest, and tomorrow we can discuss everything that¡¯s happened." They wanted to protest, but with another snap of his fingers, they were whisked away down another tunnel, leading to a different part of the hideout.
Meanwhile, in Kaisan... Once a month, the Council of the Eternal Flame gathers to discuss the future direction of the country. These meetings take place without the emperor. Two days later, the emperor learns of their decisions in another meeting, where he delivers the final judgment. Today, however, the council had called an emergency session.
In a specially designed chamber within the emperor''s palace, all five ministers were seated around a table. One of them had brought his protector¡ªspecial individuals sworn to use their Nyd to protect the ministers and their affairs. Everyone sat in silence, eyeing each other warily. Only the protector stood like a statue, awaiting orders. He wore a strange-looking armor that made him look like a knight from the future. This protector was Lance, the Spear of the Farmer. He was the protector of Drumbo, the minister of agriculture. Drumbo, overweight and clearly uncomfortable, sat there wondering when the meeting would finally be over. Then, the defense minister spoke. His name was Fintei, the exact opposite of Drumbo¡ªthin but courageous in his own way. "As you¡¯re all aware, a major battle took place in Kurani a few hours ago, nearly wiping out half the city! We haven¡¯t seen an incident like this in 15 years! I called this emergency council to quickly make some decisions before everyone starts doing whatever they want!" he said, casting a stern glance at the ministers of health and finance. The health minister, Hitto, had a thin, pointed beard and looked every bit the scheming businessman. He sighed. The finance minister, Minca, looked more like a mob boss, sitting at the table with a large, intimidating presence. Minca clicked his tongue and dismissed Fintei¡¯s accusation with a wave of his hand. Hitto responded with a sigh, "Oh, come on! Just because I tried to make a little money off that minor accident?" "A little? Because of you, nearly all those people would¡¯ve ended up on the streets!" "If they can¡¯t afford their medical bills, that¡¯s their own problem!" Hitto replied, dismissing the conversation with a flick of his hand. Shortly after, the education minister spoke up. "What does any of this have to do with me? Can I leave now?" His name was Dracko, the only one at the table who looked good in a suit. He had the air of a teacher, but his words made it clear that he¡¯d never be one, nor could he. "This concerns all of us, Dracko! You¡¯re the one who¡¯ll have to clean up the headlines!" Fintei snapped. He hated these meetings as much as the others did. But they were necessary. So that they could continue to rule this country from the shadows. 101: A new Day Tuesday, 02.05.2364
The new day began with a bitter aftertaste from the events of the day before. The happenings still weighed heavily on everyone¡¯s minds, yet people were eager to know what would happen next. Once again, many citizens gathered in front of the garrison in Kurani. The crowd was much larger than yesterday. They were aware that several commanders were now present in the garrison. Many intended to use this opportunity to pressure the military, while others immediately set to work rebuilding the city. They were too afraid to oppose the military, and that fear was justified. While the protests grew outside, the commanders inside were deliberating on their next steps. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. Despite his misconduct, Makon still attended the small council. Many believed that any one of them would have done the same in his position. Everyone was present except Finn. He had, of course, been excluded and was imprisoned in the garrison for his "crimes." After his "punishment" from Feratu, Finn had been thrown into his cell, where he now sat, bleeding and awaiting his sentence. "What do we do about the rabble outside?" "I say we mow down a few of them to stir up some fear. That¡¯ll send them scattering. Always works in the villages!" "We can¡¯t do that here! This isn¡¯t a village. This is Kurani! The biggest trading city in our country! If we cause even more unrest here, other nations will quickly take notice!" "We can¡¯t afford that!" "He¡¯s right!" "But what do we do then?" "SILENCE!!" Feratu bellowed through the room. Instantly, everyone fell silent. "As the highest-ranking officer here, I will make the decision! And refusal will not be tolerated!"
After a few minutes, the front door of the garrison opened. The crowd gathered around the fence that surrounded the garrison fell briefly silent. Feratu and Makon stepped out. "We have an announcement to make!" Feratu began. 102: The Preliminary Verdict The crowd waited in anticipation for what Feratu had to say. He took a deep breath and began. "Yesterday, Kurani was attacked! By an unknown invader from overseas! Our emperor suspected that this might happen, and that¡¯s why we were dispatched here as quickly as possible! However, we arrived too late, and the city suffered significant damage!" "Oh really? You don¡¯t say!" a citizen shouted. In an instant, Feratu¡¯s fists ignited in flames, and he locked his gaze on the man as if addressing him directly. "The commander of the 5th Unit, Fetu, fought the intruder and was defeated! Not only did HE lose the fight, but in his reckless battle, HE destroyed YOUR city! For these crimes, he is now imprisoned inside the garrison!" Some people in the crowd seemed slightly reassured by this statement, though others were not. It didn¡¯t change their situation, but there was some comfort in knowing that one of the culprits had been caught. Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. "The intruder, however, managed to escape last night! And this man here is responsible for that!" Feratu shouted, striking Makon to the ground with his flaming fists. The loud thud caused many to recoil as Makon¡¯s face hit the now-cracked asphalt. "He recognized the intruder during his escape! But instead of stopping him, he helped him flee! For these crimes, he too will be imprisoned, where he and Fetu will remain until their punishment is decided. Their verdict will be announced in a few days! Until then, the units that have been deployed to support you will assist in the rebuilding efforts, until they receive new orders and leave! That¡¯s all!" With that, Feratu grabbed Makon by his cloak and dragged him back into the building. No one in the crowd dared to speak up. After Feratu¡¯s speech, no one wanted to challenge the army. Slowly, the crowd dispersed and returned to their tasks.
Meanwhile, in the rebels¡¯ hideout... After a surprisingly restful night, Kawao and Koru returned to the cave where they had brought Kenzo the night before. "Ah! There you are," Sid said, sitting at a table in the center. "Come, sit down! We have a lot to discuss!" 103: The Alliance! Part 1 This time, the hall was not as crowded. A few scattered people carried papers from one place to another, brooding over their desks, or gathered in small groups holding quick meetings. The table where Sid sat was a large, deep dark red wooden table, with a big map of Kasaka spread across it, marked with various flags and crosses. ¡®So, this is how the rebellion operates,¡¯ Kawao thought as he and Koru sat down across from Sid. After a while, Sid began: ¡°Before we go any further, I¡ªwe¡ªneed to be certain that you support our cause! Yesterday, you mentioned that you promised to repay us for our help. But what exactly does that mean? Will you join us, assist with a mission, or share information with us? Before we say anything else, I need your answer!¡± The two exchanged glances, thinking for a while. Then they whispered to each other and looked back at Sid. ¡°We¡¯ve decided!¡± Kawao began. ¡°If you can help me with my revenge, I¡¯ll support you with everything I have and can do.¡± This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon. ¡°And if you can support him, then I¡¯ll help too! So that I can stop him if he loses himself in his quest for revenge.¡± ¡°And if we can¡¯t help you? What then?¡± ¡°Then we¡¯ll help with a mission, as you said, and go our separate ways. Don¡¯t worry; we won¡¯t turn you over to the army or anything.¡± ¡°I wouldn¡¯t expect that either. After the chaos you caused yesterday, you¡¯ve earned a lot of trust from us here.¡± Sid thought for a moment. ¡°What¡¯s the focus of your revenge? Who or what are you seeking it against?¡± ¡°My revenge is solely against those responsible for the genocide of my people. We had a peaceful and fulfilling life in the southern seas. But then, they appeared out of nowhere and destroyed everything I held dear. Whoever is responsible for this will pay with a gruesome death. I swear it!¡± ¡°Hm. Interesting. But didn¡¯t you also involve innocents yesterday? What did they have to do with your revenge?¡± ¡°Nothing! And I¡¯m incredibly sorry that I lost control and gave myself over to the fight. Fetu is on a different level, and I didn¡¯t even know if he was part of my revenge! I was confused and didn¡¯t know what to focus on. But after the fight, I found clarity! I won¡¯t involve any more innocents in my quest for revenge. I swear that, too!¡± Kawao was dead serious as he shared this with Sid, holding his hand over his heart with a look of pure determination. Sid recognized it. He smiled and nodded. ¡°I understand! Then all is well. You can¡¯t undo your actions, but you can shape the future. I¡¯m glad to see you aren¡¯t wallowing in self-pity. Very well! We¡¯ll help you! Since I first met you, I¡¯ve been trying to figure out why you came here and what your true goals might be. It seems I was right with my theory! Now I can tell you who your true target is for revenge.¡± 104: The Alliance! Part 2 "Who is it?" Kawao asked eagerly. "Who is responsible for my suffering?" He felt a slight relief. Finally, he would get closer to his goal. Until now, he had only assumed he needed to go to Kaisan, the capital. But now, he would learn his true target. Sid¡¯s expression turned serious. "Before I tell you what you want to know, you should listen to a short story." "What kind of story?" "The story of the downfall and impending destruction of Kasaka, as we know it!" "Do I really need to know this story?" "Yes! It contains important information about the recent past and present of this land. If you''re going to help us, you need to understand what we¡¯re fighting for!" "Aren¡¯t you fighting against the army?" "Yes and no! The army only stands in our way and slows us down. Our true target is what they¡¯re protecting." "What could that be?" "Once you hear the story, you¡¯ll understand."
This story began just two years ago. Back then, Kasaka was completely different from today. Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences. The Emperor ruled, the people were content, and the days passed in peace. The Emperor had a son. He was still very young, yet the Emperor was already teaching him things he¡¯d need to know when he eventually took the throne. One day, the Emperor took his son to the Council of the Eternal Flame. This council meets regularly to discuss the country¡¯s various developments and progress. Once a week, the Emperor would attend. The six ministers would present their reports and proposals, and the Emperor would decide on the course of action. Seeing this, his son was impressed. His father was a strong and kind-hearted man and ruler. After the meeting, the Emperor told his son that he could rely on the ministers and that they would support him well in his early years as Emperor. Everything seemed to be going well. But that¡¯s when the tragedy began. The Emperor didn¡¯t have the chance to teach his son that, deep down, all the ministers were corrupt, greedy, and self-serving. Though he could rely on them, he needed to be careful not to fall into their traps and make decisions that would ultimately harm the country but benefit them. They were like hungry wolves, waiting for the Emperor to slip up. Shortly afterward, the Emperor died. Officially, it was said he had succumbed to a rare, incurable disease. But the truth was that the Council of the Eternal Flame had him murdered. With deceit and treachery, they brought him down and seized control of the country. Though his young son was crowned as the next Emperor, he was still too inexperienced and easy to control. His father had taught him to trust the council, so he did. They exploited his naivety and have controlled the country from the shadows ever since. The son is isolated in the palace, kept from the outside world with lies and tricks. To this day, he doesn¡¯t know what¡¯s happening in his own land.
"So the council of ministers is responsible for my suffering?" "Yes and no! They advised the Emperor to approve an ''exploration'' of the southern seas to open up new resources. He agreed! The ''expedition'' was then organized by the admiral and the commander-in-chief of the army!" "The council, the Emperor, and the admiral! They¡¯re the ones responsible! Where are they?" "Calm down. We¡¯re not going to let you take all the glory. While the council may be the root of your misery, they¡¯ve done far worse to us and our country. So we¡¯re making you an offer: Join us. We¡¯ll help you get your revenge, and you¡¯ll help us liberate our land! We¡¯ll destroy the council! You¡¯ll get your revenge on the Emperor and the admiral! Do we have a deal?" Without hesitation, Kawao agreed. "Yes! We have a deal!" Together, they sealed their promise with a firm handshake and a long, serious gaze. 105: The Alliance! Part 3 "And what about you, Koru?" Sid turned to him next. "Will you join us as well?" "I¡¯ve already said it: if Kawao joins you, I¡¯m in! I won¡¯t let him fall into revenge." "Good to hear!" With that, the hardest part was over. "And how do you plan to reach your goal? Or rather, how do you intend to help us?" Kawao then asked. "Well, first, you both need to stay undercover. After all the commotion you caused, we¡¯ll need to wait until things settle down and the units pull out of the city. After that, we¡¯ll assign you missions that will prepare you to achieve both your goals and ours." "I understand¡­ Are you the boss here?" "Ah, yes! I hadn¡¯t mentioned that yet! Allow me to introduce myself once again." Sid stood and gave a slight bow to the two. Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road. "My name is Syd. I am the leader of the southern forces of the Kasaka Rebellion and a former admiral and war leader of Kasaka. At least until I¡­ was ¡®dismissed.¡¯" Kawao and Koru were extremely surprised. They never would have guessed that the homeless man they¡¯d met was such an important and powerful figure. "Can you train me?" Kawao asked immediately. "I¡¯m sorry, but I¡¯m currently swamped. Not only because of yesterday¡¯s events but also due to my regular duties, so I don¡¯t have time to personally train you. However¡­ you¡¯re welcome to use our large training room! I¡¯m sure you both can get stronger by the time of your first mission. Speaking of¡­ may I ask, what¡¯s your current Nyd level?" "Mine is at 10,450," Koru began. "Then you likely don¡¯t stand a chance against most commanders. Hm¡­ I¡¯ll have some people observe your training, take a look at your techniques, and maybe help you get stronger. Otherwise, I¡¯ll adjust the mission accordingly to make sure you¡¯re as ready as possible." "Alright, thank you!" "And yours?" "Mine was 18,450. But after the recent fights, it may have increased." "Hm. I see. We¡¯ll measure your Nyd level right away. I¡¯m very curious about what you could become, especially given your quest for revenge. If you want to defeat the Emperor, you¡¯ll have to get much stronger!" "Do you know my opponents¡¯ Nyd levels?" Kawao asked, slightly excited. "Not precisely. But I can give you an approximate number!" Kawao listened intently. Rarely had he been as eager as he was in that moment. "The admiral is likely around 60,000-70,000. The Emperor, however, being younger, I¡¯d estimate to be around 100,000-150,000." 106: The Alliance! Part 4 After the conversation, the three headed to the Nyd meter. Syd was genuinely curious to see if Kawao would meet his expectations. They walked through several hallways and eventually reached a smaller room. Unlike the little hut where he¡¯d first had his Nyd measured, this room was clean, orderly, and looked more like an interrogation room. Beside the Nyd meter, which looked much cleaner, more modern, and hummed softly, was a small table with various sheets of paper and pens. Syd took one of each and indicated that Kawao should use the machine. Following Syd''s instruction, Kawao placed his arms into the designated slots. As his power was measured, his curiosity got the best of him. "What¡¯s with the paper and pen?" "We always record the latest Nyd readings of our stronger members to keep track of our overall strength as a group. It also helps us better assign reinforcements or missions." If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it. With a small ding, the machine chimed. The result was ready! Both looked eagerly at the display, where his power level would be shown in glowing numbers. 22,260! Over 4,000 more than last time! He had grown noticeably stronger. A smile spread across Syd''s face. "It should actually be higher if you fought Fetu as an equal." "I was using a new technique called ¡®Stage One,¡¯ which roughly doubles my strength." "Then that adds up. That would put you at around 44,520 during the fight." "Exactly." "Much better than I expected, but you still have a long way to go¡­ But don¡¯t worry! We¡¯ll push your strength higher through the right missions!" Syd said, full of anticipation.
Syd then advised them to spend the rest of the day familiarizing themselves with the hideout while he worked on plans with the new information. Tomorrow, they would begin their training. The two agreed and explored the rebels'' hideout nestled in the mountains around Kurani.
The rest of the day was peaceful. The city¡¯s residents got to work rebuilding, with help from the units still stationed there. Around midday, the 18th and 19th Units departed for new missions. Verbo¡¯s 18th Unit was ordered to return to Cruscrax as soon as possible, as strange things had reportedly been happening there since his unit¡¯s departure. Ertio¡¯s 19th Unit was to return to the capital for new, highly classified missions. And so, the day came to a quiet close. 107: The Training Part 1 Wednesday, 03.05.2364 Kawao and Koru woke up early. They were a bit excited for the training that would start today, which was meant to make them stronger. After a decent breakfast, they were led to a large room filled with various training equipment, where a few people were already working out. "Your trainers will be here soon. Take a look around," said the two who had brought them, before leaving the pair on their own. Without hesitation, they began to walk around, examining the equipment. Some of the other rebels who were training stopped, watching the two and whispering to each other. After a while, they were approached. "Hey, you two!" They turned around. In front of them stood a well-built man who was smiling at them with a hint of challenge. The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. "How about we train together?" "Gladly!" they both replied in unison. First, they headed over to the running track painted around the edge of the hall, which stretched for about a kilometer in a loop. After warming up, the three got ready. At the clap of a fellow rebel, the small race began. While Koru and the rebel had a close race, Kawao effortlessly lapped them a few times, aided by his Nyd. After three laps, he decided to continue on his own strength and slowed down to join the other two. Now they were all at the same pace. "Decided not to rely solely on your Nyd anymore?" "No. Strengthening your own body is also good sometimes." But instead of slowing down further, Kawao gradually sped up. His lifelong training as a hunter in his village had given him above-average endurance and strength. After the run, they moved to the 100-kilo weightlifting station. Once again, Kawao managed the challenge without using his Nyd. Koru, however, struggled more. It was clear he had been relying too much on his ability. Finally, there was a short sparring session with the rebel. Kawao went first. He easily dodged all attacks and, with a few well-placed strikes and kicks, quickly had his opponent on the mat. Then it was Koru''s turn. He also had no trouble. His years as a mercenary had taught him to handle enemies even without his Nyd. Together, they showed everyone in the room that they had real skill. The rebel they were sparring with was actually the strongest non-Nyd user on the base. Suddenly, they heard clapping behind them. 108: The Training Part 2 Sid appeared with two men, who were likely to be their trainers. "Not bad. But that¡¯s the bare minimum I¡¯d expect from you¡ªand especially from you, Kawao!" With a wave of his hand, he motioned for the others to leave the room. After a brief hesitation, they did so. Some looked back at the two with disbelief, deciding to linger by the door to see what would happen next. After a moment, Sid spoke again: "Alright! I already have something in mind to start with. In this exercise, you¡¯ll train your Nyd together. Your trainers have brought several small stones," he explained, pointing to the two men behind him. Each trainer carried two sacks filled with small stones. "Koru, your task is to enlarge the stones mid-flight as much as possible, and Kawao, you¡¯re to smash them before they hit the ground." "Isn¡¯t that a bit dangerous?" Koru asked, unsure whether this would actually work. Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator. "If you want to increase your power, you have to be willing to use more extreme methods! Try it a few times, and then we¡¯ll see how it goes." He smiled at them and stepped back, while the trainers approached Koru, placing the stones at his feet. The two exchanged a slightly uncertain glance but decided to give it a real try. Koru picked up one of the stones and tossed it in a high arc toward Kawao. A moment later, he enlarged the stone, turning it into a large boulder. Kawao quickly gathered energy, and just before the boulder reached him, he struck it. With a massive crack, it shattered into pieces that landed around him on the ground. Sid smiled slightly and approached them again. "Yes, that¡¯s roughly how it should go. This will be your training for the next few days. Your trainers will add new requirements after a while, such as having Koru throw the stones not only at Kawao but in different directions so he¡¯ll have to move more. But for now, keep going like this! I need to get back to other matters. If you need anything, ask your trainers. Otherwise, I¡¯ll see you when your assignments are ready!" With this final instruction, he left. As he walked out, he saw the other rebels watching the training in disbelief, realizing this was a whole different league from what they were used to.
Around noon, Jack left the city with her 13th Unit. Her unit was to head to Karuni, Kurani¡¯s twin city. Since her departure, the city had reportedly become a frequent target of minor pirate raids. She and her unit were tasked with restoring peace and security there. Six commanders who have yet to receive orders remained in Kurani. 109: The Encounter Part 1 Thursday, 04.05.2364 The city¡¯s reconstruction progressed quickly, thanks to the help from the units. However, as each unit gradually left the city, the goal felt increasingly distant. On this day, yet another unit was ordered to depart. This time, it was the 20th Unit under Funo. Unlike the other units, he left the city without any real reason. He lied, claiming that he had been ordered back to Kunkan. The other commanders saw through it immediately. He was lazy, arrogant, and a deceitful swine who just wanted a simple, controllable life. That¡¯s why he left the city before Makon and Fetu¡¯s verdicts were announced. He didn¡¯t care. He only wanted to return to his city, where he was the boss and his word was law. So, no one said anything as he, relieved but irritated, left the city through the main gate with his unit. The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.
In the Rebels'' Hideout, Evening: After training, Kawao rested for a few minutes while Koru went off to shower. Apparently, through an old, unknown method, they could wash with fresh, filtered seawater, even in the mountain''s depths. Even after just one day, the training had intensified considerably. They couldn¡¯t stop until he had shattered every single stone. Yesterday, Koru had been instructed to throw the stones in different directions to keep him moving. Today, he was required to shatter the rocks into more pieces than before. He could only manage this by using a lot more energy. The more energy he used at once, the more it strained his body and his Nyd¡ªa good way to train. He was sure that after this, he had definitely grown stronger. After resting, he left the hall, making way for the other rebels who now waited for the end of their training, eager not to be struck by stray stones. Once everyone was inside and the door was closed, Kawao set off. When he reached a crossroads after a while, something immediately caught his attention. Strange. There wasn¡¯t a crossroads here before, was there? He looked around briefly. It was dead silent, and no one was nearby. After a moment, he headed in the direction he was sure was correct. After a while, he reached another crossroads. And along his path, there were no doors or other markings. Only torches on the wall. He paused again. Then he ran forward, straight ahead. Quickly, he reached another crossroads. And then another. And yet another. After three more crossroads, he stopped. Something was definitely off here. He decided to wait a moment. What¡¯s going on here? Is this a Nyd? A test? Or an attack? he wondered. Suddenly, a bright light flashed behind him. 110: The Encounter Part 2 He turned around. In front of him stood a figure shrouded in a bright light. The light was blinding, making it impossible for him to clearly see who it was, but something about them seemed oddly familiar. Suddenly, the figure raised a finger, motioning for him to follow. Then, just as quickly, they ran ahead of him. "Hey! Wait!" he shouted, and began to follow.
Even after what felt like several minutes, he couldn¡¯t get any closer. He ran and ran, but the distance between them didn¡¯t shrink. Not even when he used his Nyd. Eventually, he became so focused on the chase that he didn¡¯t notice as everything around him grew dark, until he was running through complete darkness. Then, suddenly, the figure stopped and turned around. They smiled, raising their arms as if to embrace him. But he was moving too fast to stop in time and ran right through them. Through them? Yes. It was as if he had passed through a mist. He quickly came to a halt. At first, he thought he had hit them so hard they were gone and he¡¯d be covered in blood. This text was taken from Royal Road. Help the author by reading the original version there. But he was clean. Confused, he looked around. The figure reappeared before him, still smiling. ¡°You haven¡¯t changed!¡± they said in a familiar tone. ¡°Well¡­ no, that¡¯s not true! You have changed! You¡¯ve finally defined your goal and finally taken my advice. I thought at first you couldn¡¯t perceive me, but if that were the case, who knows what else would be in store for us.¡± ¡°Who are you?¡± ¡°You know who I am!¡± He thought about it but couldn¡¯t figure it out. It felt as if he¡¯d met this person before. But every time he thought he remembered, the memory slipped away, leaving him uncertain. ¡°I¡­ really don¡¯t know!¡± ¡°The last time, you recognized me. Maybe it was because you were full of adrenaline and close to death¡­ Yes, that must be it! But I can still reach out to you, even if only briefly.¡± ¡°Briefly?¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right! I don¡¯t have much time left!¡± Slowly, the light began to fade. ¡°So, let me quickly share my two messages! The first is to congratulate you¡ªyou¡¯re finally paying more attention to yourself, and you¡¯ve defined your goals. Perhaps that¡¯s even why I was able to contact you. Who knows. The second is a warning!¡± A warning? ¡°You¡¯ve chosen some powerful and dangerous opponents. Even if you train until you drop, you won¡¯t be able to defeat them in time. Not to mention all the other people on this planet who are much stronger¡­ But anyway! Here¡¯s what I mean, simple to say, harder to do: Learn to use your power more efficiently! Taking in more energy doesn¡¯t necessarily mean you¡¯re stronger! With that mindset, you¡¯ll never get strong quickly enough! Find a way to use energy to become stronger without overloading your body. Your ¡®Stage One¡¯ is nothing more than a water balloon filled to the point of bursting. If you learn to use the energy you have in that state more efficiently, you can become exponentially stronger without much effort. You¡¯ve already taken the first step! Now, keep building and unlock your full potential!¡± The light and the figure were about to fade completely. ¡°Our time is up! Think about my words. And beware of your enemies! Not everyone is as they seem! Be cautious of¡­¡± Then they vanished completely, before they could finish speaking. Kawao had no idea what had just happened. At first, he thought it might be an attack from the Church of Madness, but something felt different. It didn¡¯t feel like a nightmare. It felt more like a vision. The darkness around him faded, and he found himself standing at the crossroads again. A rebel rounded the corner and spotted him. ¡°Oh, hi! ¡­ What¡¯s up? Did you get lost?¡± Kawao hesitated for a moment. ¡°No, thanks. I¡¯m fine!¡± he replied, quickly heading toward his room. For now, he wanted to forget what had just happened. But he would dwell on it all night, until he eventually fell asleep from sheer exhaustion and fatigue. 111: The Verdict! Part 1 Friday, 05.05.2364 Today was the day the verdict for Makon and Fetu would be delivered. It was still early morning, yet crowds of citizens were already gathering outside the entrance to the garrison¡ªjust as they had done three days earlier. This time, however, their anticipation was palpable, even though the verdict was not scheduled to be announced until noon. Many were eager to find out what fate awaited the two criminals.
From his quarters, Sankesh calmly observed the masses gathering in front of the garrison. Like insects, he thought. And I could just burn them all to ash. This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon. He smiled. ¡°Don¡¯t even think about it!¡± He turned toward the voice. It was Rando. ¡°I wasn¡¯t going to do anything!¡± ¡°Yes, you were. You had that look again.¡± ¡°What look?¡± ¡°You know the one I¡¯m talking about. Now, come on! Focus on what¡¯s important,¡± she said, gesturing slightly toward the other commanders, who were deep in discussion. Most of the commanders had already left. Only he, Rando, Feratu, and Pinoir remained. The others had received new orders and departed. Not that he cared. He was indifferent to the outcome of this verdict. Whatever the result, it wouldn¡¯t affect him in the slightest. So, he watched with mild amusement as Feratu and Pinoir argued over Fetu¡¯s fate, while Rando tried to mediate and separate them. They were the only ones truly invested in the verdict. The other commanders, who had already left, hadn¡¯t offered any comments on the matter. It simply didn¡¯t concern them¡ªjust as it didn¡¯t concern him. The debate dragged on for quite some time until Rando and Sankesh were forced to weigh in and break the deadlock. Their input helped finalize the decision. Shortly after noon, the garrison doors opened, and Feratu, along with the other commanders, emerged with Fetu and Makon in chains. 112: The Verdict! Part 2 As the commanders exited the garrison building, silence fell immediately. Everyone present remembered what happened the last time they defied the commanders and had no desire to repeat it. A few meters from the gate, the group came to a stop. For a moment, all was quiet. Then Feratu raised his voice. ¡°We have reached a verdict. A verdict for those responsible for this incident. First, we have Makon! The commander of the 17th Unit and head of this garrison! For his crimes¡ªfailing to oppose the direct threat to his city and allowing that danger to escape¡ªthe verdict is as follows: He will be stripped of his position as garrison leader and his title of commander! Furthermore, he is sentenced to death! However, the execution will not take place immediately. He will be transferred to the capital, where the Council of the Eternal Flame will review his case one last time. Until then, he will be imprisoned in Kal Kakei, where he will await his final judgment. If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. But it is highly likely the sentence will remain death.¡± At the mention of Kal Kakei, the crowd collectively held its breath. It wasn¡¯t the death sentence itself that struck fear into them¡ªit was the name of the prison to which he was being sent. Kal Kakei. Also known as the ¡°Island of Burning Death,¡± it is the most secure and heavily guarded prison in Kasaka. The prison lies on a volcanic island north of the capital. A small island within the volcano is entirely surrounded by magma. Through a complex system of tunnels and conduits, the lava flow is carefully controlled and used to ensure the prison¡¯s security. Only the most dangerous enemies of the state are sent there, never to see daylight again. Feratu took a deep breath. ¡°And as for Fetu!¡± he continued. ¡°He will be released by direct order of the emperor!¡± Immediately, the crowd erupted in shocked and confused murmurs. ¡°Why His Majesty made this decision, I do not know. However, about an hour ago, we received a flame messenger with this very order. For now, Fetu is to remain within the garrison until further instructions are given.¡± It was clear from Feratu¡¯s reddening face that he was seething with rage. ¡°But rest assured! I will see to it that he pays for his crimes in due time!¡± he declared, glaring at Fetu with a look of pure hatred.
Without another word, the commanders departed the scene. Before they reentered the building, they unlocked Fetu¡¯s chains, leaving him free. Once the commanders were inside, the crowd outside began buzzing with loud conversations about what they had just witnessed.
Later that day, Pinoir and Rando left the city with their respective units. Pinoir had already received his orders the previous day but had decided to stay and see the verdict for Fetu. After all, the two were, in some strange way, friends¡ªthough Pinoir was embarrassed to admit it. Rando had also waited for the verdict but only received her orders that morning. The two passed through the city gates together, with Rando teasing Pinoir relentlessly about his relationship with Fetu, clearly enjoying herself. 113: Theories Saturday, 06.05.2364 After another exhausting training session, Kawao and Koru made their way back to their rooms. On the way, they talked about the events of the past few days. "Do you happen to know what kind of Nyd Syd has?" Kawao asked. "Not exactly. But I¡¯ve heard rumors!" "What kind of rumors?" "They say he might be the ¡®Hero of Kurani.¡¯ The one who saved and rebuilt the city during the last war. If he really is, then the rebellion definitely has better chances of winning! You¡¯ve probably seen the mosaic in front of the city gates, haven¡¯t you? It depicts the story of what happened back then. ... But if he really is the one, then he¡¯d likely have a weapon-creation Nyd." "Weapon-creation?" "Yes, that describes a type of Nyd that allows you to create weapons¡ªor objects in general¡ªwith your Nyd and use them." Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings. "Sounds like a strong ability!" "It is! But only if it¡¯s really him." A brief silence followed. "Did you already know about Kenzo''s Nyd?" "No, why?" "Just curious. You seem to know more about the world than I do, so I thought you might know of some notable Nyd-users." "I do know a few. But she¡¯s not one of them. ... Although, her Nyd does remind me of another." "Of what kind?" "It¡¯s just a thought, but her Nyd is quite similar to that of a powerful Nyd-user from my homeland. He could also create staffs with a similar pattern and use them. ... Could the two be connected...? No, surely not!" "What are you thinking?" "I know you don¡¯t know much about the Wars of the Lost, but in the second war, there was a very powerful Nyd-user who, according to legend, ended the war. He wielded a staff that could split the heavens and the earth." "What happened to him?" "I don¡¯t know. He probably died. That war ended over 70 years ago!" "You think her Nyd resembles his?" "Maybe. It just crossed my mind." Soon after, they reached their rooms. Before Kawao could enter his, Koru stopped him. "One more thing!" "What is it?" "I wanted to warn you about someone." "Who?" "You told me you¡¯ve dealt with the Church of Madness, right?" "Yeah." "Then there¡¯s someone in particular you need to watch out for. Especially after everything that¡¯s happened in Kurani!" "Who are you talking about?" "One of their bishops: Muniorai. He¡¯s a madman who kills indiscriminately and leaves destruction wherever he goes! They say he was involved in the invasion of Kurani during the last war and shares the same ideology as the ¡®Demon of Kurani!¡¯" "Demon of Kurani? Who¡¯s that?" "He¡¯s the one responsible for most of the destruction and deaths during the invasion! After the war, he was executed as part of the peace treaty." "And this Muniorai is supposed to be¡­?" "Just like him! Just as brutal! Just as violent and insane!"
That same day, Sankesh left the city. He had been assigned the task of escorting Makon to Kal Kakei. 114: An unclear Future Sunday, 07.05.2364 For nearly two days, Finn had stayed almost continuously in his room. After being released from captivity, he returned to his quarters to recover from the wounds he had recently sustained¡ªthose from his fight with Kawao and the punishment inflicted by Feratu. One day, Feratu would pay for everything he had done to him over the years. Of that, Finn was certain. Most of his wounds had healed by now. Only a few bruises remained here and there, along with a bandage wrapped around his torso that seemed to shrink a little more with each passing day. He left his room only to eat. While the other commanders helped with the city¡¯s reconstruction, he remained in the garrison. Yet he felt no guilt about it. Unlike most other commanders, Finn was well-liked by the citizens. They knew he came from the lower class before working his way up. Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road. And they knew he treated them well, befriending and helping them whenever possible, instead of controlling them through fear, hatred, and despair. That¡¯s why Finn was confident the people of the city wouldn¡¯t hold a grudge against him, even though he had destroyed half the city. They knew he would never do something like that intentionally. But if he were to help with the reconstruction now, the other commanders would bully him again. And he couldn¡¯t afford to fight back, not while he was in such a precarious position. It would also harm the morale of the citizens if they saw him in such a state. He sighed quietly to himself. What would become of him? Suddenly, a small flame shot through his window and landed in a corner of the room. The flame didn¡¯t shatter the glass but passed through it like a ghost. Finn immediately knew what it was. A messenger flame. A special flame that carried a message only accessible to its intended recipient. The flame hovered slowly from the corner to his outstretched hand, where it landed. It felt slightly cool to the touch. Quickly, a red and gold silhouette formed within the fire¡ªthe silhouette of the Emperor! ¡°Fetu! Proceed immediately with your unit to Kaisan and deliver your report to me. Afterward, you will receive your judgment!¡± The Emperor¡¯s firm and resolute voice resounded. Moments later, the flame vanished, leaving behind a small symbol on Finn¡¯s palm¡ªa golden phoenix encircling a flame. The symbol indicated that the message had come directly from the Emperor. Finn took a deep breath and prepared to leave.
Later that same day, Finn departed for Kaisan with his unit. As he had expected, the citizens of Kurani did not greet him with hateful looks. 115: First Missions Monday, 08.05.2364 Around midday, Kawao and Koru were summoned to Syd. He was in the main hall of the hideout, the same place where they had joined the rebellion, and he finally had their first missions ready. Filled with anticipation, they entered the hall, which was as bustling as ever. The only calm area was the large table in the center, now empty except for Syd, who sat there with a few documents spread out before him. As they approached, he noticed them. ¡°Ah, there you are! Sit down, sit down.¡± Once they had taken their seats, Syd folded his hands together and looked at them seriously. ¡°First of all, I¡¯m pleased with how your training has gone. I¡¯ve been observing you from time to time. You¡¯ve made great progress!¡± ¡°We wouldn¡¯t have achieved that without your help,¡± Kawao said. ¡°Nonsense! You delivered the results; I merely provided the tools. But let¡¯s get to the point¡ªyour first missions.¡± They swallowed nervously. This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it. ¡°First, you¡¯ll both head north. Your joint target will be the fork in the road leading to Cruscrax. There, Kawao, you¡¯ll meet another field agent. He doesn¡¯t have a Nyd but is skilled at staying hidden. Together, you¡¯ll take over a small army outpost controlling the fork. Meanwhile, Koru, you¡¯ll remain out of sight until they¡¯ve secured the outpost. Once you¡¯ve received their signal, you¡¯ll head to Cruscrax, where your next mission will begin. At the same time, Kawao, you¡¯ll continue north to Kunkan to begin your next task.¡± ¡°Does this mean we won¡¯t be traveling together after the first mission?¡± Koru asked. ¡°Exactly!¡± ¡°But why? I need to stop him from going on a rampage!¡± ¡°And you¡¯ve done such a great job of that here!¡± Syd countered sarcastically. Koru was frustrated and slightly dejected, unable to argue. ¡°Don¡¯t get me wrong,¡± Syd continued. ¡°We¡¯d love to send you both together toward Kaisan, but right now, you¡¯re much more valuable to us here in the south. Strange things have been happening in Cruscrax recently. Some residents are disappearing, and there are rumors of a conspiracy spreading through the city. Your job will be to join the rebels there and get to the bottom of it! But don¡¯t worry about Kawao¡ªyou¡¯ll see him again sooner or later!¡± Koru glanced at Kawao for a moment, then slowly calmed down. ¡°Alright. I understand!¡± ¡°Good!¡± Syd said before turning to Kawao. ¡°Once you reach Kunkan, the local rebels will train you to improve your stealth skills. You need to master this to ensure you don¡¯t jeopardize future missions or the achievement of your goals. Right now, you¡¯re far too easily spotted.¡± After a pause, Kawao replied: ¡°I understand. I was trained as a warrior, an unforgiving hunter¡ªnot someone who sneaks around or hides. But if it helps me reach my goal, I¡¯ll do my best to learn stealth.¡± ¡°That¡¯s the spirit! You¡¯ll both set off tomorrow morning. Rest until then¡ªyou¡¯ll be woken when it¡¯s time.¡±
Meanwhile, at the same time, Feratu also departed from Kurani. His mission remained a secret until the very end. 116: Farewell to Kurani Tuesday, 09.05.2364 Today, they were woken up earlier. Around 4 a.m., they were told to get ready. Before their alarms could go off, they were handed some clothes. When they asked why they couldn¡¯t choose their outfits, the response was: ¡°Sid decided it. You¡¯re supposed to look like two ordinary travelers. Especially you, Kawao¡ªyou still don¡¯t have enough experience staying under the radar.¡± Even though the comment stung a bit, Kawao knew it was the truth. Annoyed but resigned, he swallowed his pride and held his tongue. Both were filled with anticipation. They dressed quickly, taking a moment to glance at their reflections in the mirror. Their outfits consisted of slightly tattered light-red garments, designed to make them look like humble travelers. The goal was to appear as inconspicuous civilians. After a moment to catch their breath and steel themselves, they left their rooms and exchanged a brief look. With a nod, they followed two nearby rebels who led them through the base. Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators! Much like their first journey through the hidden passages, they traversed numerous winding corridors. This time, however, some of the routes felt familiar. Within minutes, they arrived at one of the exits. It wasn¡¯t the same one they had entered from, but they knew it would lead them outside the city. Sid was already waiting for them. ¡°Good, you¡¯re punctual.¡± He gestured toward the exit. ¡°When you step out, you¡¯ll find yourselves on a lightly forested slope. If you head downhill, you¡¯ll soon reach the road. However, stay vigilant¡ªthere could still be soldiers patrolling nearby. If you¡¯re approached or questioned, let Koru do the talking. Got it?¡± They gave a quick nod. ¡°And you¡¯ve got all the mission details in your heads, right? Just to be sure, repeat them back to me.¡± The pair recited their missions, detailing each objective. Sid listened attentively, his face breaking into a satisfied smile. ¡°Good. You¡¯re ready. Before you go, I have one last message from Kenzo for you.¡± Sid¡¯s expression turned serious as he delivered her words: ¡°When we meet again, don¡¯t get in my way, you idiots!¡± Both of them smiled and then burst out laughing. ¡°Yep, that sounds like her.¡± With a firm tone, Sid stamped his foot on the ground. The door creaked open, flooding the corridor with sunlight. ¡°Now, get moving!¡± For the first time in what felt like forever, they stepped out into the bright morning sun. 117: Fields of Reflection Shortly after their departure, the door closed behind them. Without much hesitation, they began their descent. The sun had not yet risen, but they could sense the growing light. As they reached the bottom, the first rays of sunlight gently touched the face of Una. Now, they found themselves in a denser forest than before. The trees on the hillside were sparse, but down here, even bushes provided cover they could sneak through. And sneak they did. They kept a careful watch on their surroundings, slowly but surely making their way toward the road. Before long, they reached it. After checking their surroundings one last time, they stepped onto the road and followed it out of the ravine¡¯s entrance. You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story. That was the exit they had taken. Fortunately, they made it onto the road unnoticed, needing only to maintain the appearance of wandering travelers. As the sun rose fully, they arrived at a vast plain. As far as the eye could see, there was lush grass dotted with the occasional farmhouse. Kawao was left breathless. No matter where he went on the mainland, the scenery always managed to astound him. Koru couldn¡¯t help but smile as he watched his friend¡¯s amazed expression. But Kawao quickly noticed something. ¡°Why is the grass here both green and red?¡± he asked aloud. It was true. The entire plain was scattered with patches of green and red grass, large and small. ¡°That¡¯s connected to the last War of the Lost,¡± Koru explained. ¡°Back then, there were many battles here, leaving the land abandoned. Where the grass grows red marks where people fought and died using their Nyds. For certain powerful users¡ªlike you, whose Nyd source is their heart¡ªtheir power flows through their blood. When their blood was spilled here, the Nyd within seeped into the soil, affecting the local flora and turning it red.¡± ¡°Is it like this in your homeland too?¡± ¡°Yes, to some extent. But there, it usually takes on a grayish tone, like ash.¡± As they continued their journey, they spoke further about the landscape and the region, momentarily forgetting their mission. 118: Arrival at the Tower By midday, they reached their destination. Ahead of them, the road forked in two directions: one leading north and the other west. Just east of the intersection stood a small hill. Atop it was a small but well-fortified tower, where the army was stationed. But before Kawao could focus on his mission, he had to bid farewell to his friend. As they reached the fork, they looked into each other¡¯s eyes. ¡°So, this is where we part ways,¡± Kawao began. ¡°Yes¡­ At least for now,¡± Koru replied. If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. A heavy silence followed. Then Kawao clapped his hands together, shaking off the tension, and spoke clearly. ¡°Good luck with your mission! We¡¯ll meet again when I¡¯ve carried out my revenge!¡± Koru smiled at him. ¡°Exactly. We¡¯ll see each other again! And when we do, I¡¯ll stop you, no matter what it takes!¡± ¡°You¡¯re welcome to try!¡± With a friendly handshake and one final, firm embrace, they said their goodbyes. Then, they each went their separate ways.
Kawao slowly and cautiously made his way toward the tower overlooking the fork. The hill was dotted with numerous bushes, both large and small¡ªperfect for hiding. Under the cover of the bushes, he crept closer and closer to the tower. Where¡¯s the guy I¡¯m supposed to meet? he wondered. He was close enough now to see the soldiers stationed there. They didn¡¯t seem to notice him and looked rather bored. Should I wait a bit longer or¡ª ¡°You must be Kawao, right?¡± He turned around slowly. Behind him crouched someone who looked like they had watched far too many war movies. The man was completely covered in dirt and mud, dressed in camouflaged clothing. Was this his contact? ¡°Yes¡­ that¡¯s me. ¡­And you are?¡± ¡°Your contact! The name¡¯s Sordo! Nice to meet you!¡± 119: The Plan "You¡¯re my contact?" "Yes. Surprised?" "A little." "This is war! Our war! We¡¯re fighting for the freedom of our country! Nothing should be too good for that!" "... I guess you¡¯re right." For a moment, they observed the tower in silence. Luckily, they hadn¡¯t been spotted yet. "So... If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. What¡¯s the plan?" Kawao whispered to Sordo. "We¡¯ll wait for the next shift change. Then we¡¯ll sneak inside, take out all the soldiers as quickly as possible, and seize control of the tower." "Sounds pretty straightforward." "It¡¯s not. I¡¯ve been here for three days observing their routines. There are 20 soldiers holding the tower in total. Once we¡¯re inside, your priority is to secure their communications device at all costs! You absolutely must not destroy it! If you do, the other outposts will immediately know something¡¯s wrong. You¡¯ll need to push ahead, secure the device, and defend it until we¡¯ve cleared the tower!" "What does the device look like?" "It¡¯s in the back left corner on a desk. You¡¯ll know it when you see it." Sordo then gave Kawao a quick rundown of the tower¡¯s layout. In the rear, there was a raised platform functioning as an intermediate floor. From the platform, stairs on both sides led to the second floor, where the soldiers¡¯ sleeping quarters were located. But their focus was on securing the ground floor. Soon enough, the shift change began. "Now!" Sordo whispered urgently. Together, they trailed the departing soldiers and hid near the entrance to the tower. They peeked inside. The soldiers who had just finished their shift informed the next group to head out. Toward the back, on the platform, a few soldiers were chatting casually. Sordo gave Kawao a hand signal to begin. Kawao dashed forward. 120: First Bounty It took a few moments for the soldiers to realize what was happening. Kawao spotted the communications device immediately and was already halfway there. Sordo, meanwhile, used a retractable spear to attack and take down a soldier. At that moment, all the soldiers readied themselves for combat. While most of them rushed toward Sordo, one of the soldiers on the raised platform noticed Kawao. Initially, neither of them saw him. The soldier glanced briefly at Sordo before standing up. He sighed lightly. With a massive leap, he jumped down toward Sordo, grabbing him by the neck with one hand. In a single motion, he slammed Sordo with full force against a table, which shattered upon impact. Bloodstains appeared on the broken remnants of the table. The soldier didn¡¯t release his grip. A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. He swung Sordo like a rag doll and hurled him toward Kawao, catching him completely off guard and knocking him to the ground. As Kawao fell, he managed to topple the table holding the communications device with a wave of energy. The device hit the floor but didn¡¯t break. Instead, it emitted a burst of static. ¡°Commander! They¡¯ve hit the ¡®Fire Caller!¡¯¡± one of the soldiers shouted. The device, known as the Fire Caller, was used to send flame messages. Wait... Commander?! Kawao quickly looked up. Towering above him was the imposing figure of an extremely fiery man. With an expression of utter annoyance and disdain, the man glared down at them. Sordo was motionless, lying next to Kawao. For a moment, neither of them moved. Then, the commander prepared to kick. Kawao quickly grabbed Sordo under one arm and narrowly dodged as the man¡¯s foot slammed into the wall behind them, leaving a gaping hole. They were now surrounded by soldiers. Just as they were about to attack, the commander stopped them. ¡°Wait!¡± he shouted. ¡°I¡¯ll handle these two! You, go outside and make sure they don¡¯t escape!¡± ¡°But Commander Feratu, we¡ª¡± ¡°I said GET OUT!¡± Immediately, the room fell silent, and the soldiers scrambled outside. Feratu. Wasn¡¯t he the commander of the 1st Unit? How was Kawao supposed to stand a chance against someone like that? He assessed his situation: Sordo was unconscious. They were surrounded, and now he faced an opponent he likely couldn¡¯t defeat. ¡°So, you¡¯re the one who caused all the chaos in Kurani? The Gray Demon?¡± ¡°Gray Demon? Are you talking about me?¡± ¡°Who else? ... You probably don¡¯t know yet, but there¡¯s a bounty on your head.¡± ¡°A bounty? On me?¡± ¡°Yes. You¡¯re quite famous now, with a reward of 44,000 gold!¡± 121: Man vs. Wilderness "Does that mean you''re after my bounty?" "No, I''m not some lowly bounty hunter. As a commander of the Kasaka Army, I''ll either capture you or kill you in the attempt!" The commander sneered. "I hope you don''t die too quickly!" Kawao took a combat stance and began channeling more energy. "And which commander do I have the honor of facing?" "The commander of the First Unit! Feratu, the Wandering Wild! Let¡¯s see if you can survive the jungle!" "I''m pretty confident I can!" Suddenly, Feratu began to transform. He dropped to all fours, his body igniting in flames as his hands and feet turned into razor-sharp claws. Before Kawao''s eyes, he morphed into a massive flaming jaguar. "Flaming Beast: Jaguar!" Kawao only seemed mildly surprised. In recent days, he had learned more about different types of Nyds. His opponent was using a metamorphic Nyd, which allowed him to transform into another form. This was achieved because his Nyd artifact contained the soul of the entity he could transform into¡ª in Feratu''s case, the soul of a jaguar. Luckily, Kawao had some experience fighting wild animals. Feratu leaped at him. Kawao crouched, ready. And the hunt began. Feratu attacked like a feral beast, his burning claws slashing relentlessly. Tables and chairs shattered and ignited wherever his blows landed. Kawao dodged the first few strikes with ease, but then, just as he avoided an attack and maneuvered behind Feratu, his opponent''s tail elongated and lashed out, striking him with brutal force. The tail caught Kawao''s side. Although he managed to shield himself with energy, the blow shredded part of his clothing and left his skin red and lightly burned. This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source. I forgot¡ªhe¡¯s not just a wild animal. He¡¯s a man in the form of a beast! That makes him far more dangerous. He¡¯s also using techniques no ordinary animal could. I underestimated him. Kawao reevaluated the situation. If I couldn¡¯t beat Fetu, how am I supposed to defeat him? I¡¯m still too weak to achieve my revenge. But if I can survive this, I¡¯ll grow stronger. I need to escape with Sordo. This isn¡¯t the time for a decisive fight! Feratu perched on a large cabinet, glaring down like a predator stalking its prey. "You¡¯re holding up better than I expected," Feratu growled, his tone laced with animalistic menace. The situation was dire. Kawao scanned the room quickly. There! Sordo¡¯s retractable spear lay among the wreckage of a table a few meters away. If Kawao could get the spear, he might stand a chance. He had spent his life hunting with a spear. With that weapon and his strength, he could at least hold his ground. Feratu lunged again. This is my chance! As Feratu leaped, Kawao dashed forward, sliding under the beast and grabbing the spear. Feratu turned, snarling, to face him. Kawao extended the spear and let it rest in his hands. It felt natural, like an extension of his body. He gathered his energy, pouring it into the weapon. "Stage One: Grey Glare!" The familiar grey aura enveloped him. His training had improved his control over this form. It still wasn¡¯t perfect, but it was manageable. Energy coursed through the spear, strengthening and reinforcing it. "Ready for round two?" "Now I see why they call you the Grey Demon. This just got interesting!" The battle resumed, now more balanced. The spear made all the difference. Kawao could not only dodge Feratu''s flaming claws but deflect them as well. His improved technique allowed him to fight on even terms. For a brief moment, Kawao thought victory might be within reach. But that hope vanished when Feratu unleashed another technique. He began moving at blinding speed, leaping erratically around the room. "Beast Hunt: Jaguar!" Feratu bellowed, entering a frenzied state. Like a hurricane, he tore through the tower, his claws slashing everything in sight. Furniture and walls disintegrated under the assault. Kawao struggled to protect himself and the unconscious Sordo, taking several hits in the process. When the storm of attacks finally ended, Kawao was left panting heavily. His clothes were in tatters, and long, sharp wounds covered his body. Without the protection of Stage One, he would have been reduced to a bloody pulp. Feratu¡¯s attacks had turned the tower into a smoldering ruin. Even the walls bore gaping holes from his rampage. But then Kawao noticed something¡ªthe tower was groaning, creaking under its own weight. The structure was collapsing. He had to get out, now. Feratu began spinning rapidly, his tail extending further. "Burning Storm Tail!" Kawao acted immediately. He hoisted Sordo onto his shoulder, breaking through a nearby wall to escape the collapsing tower. Moments later, the structure gave way entirely. Feratu looked up in shock as the mighty tower crumbled, burying him under the rubble. The area was engulfed in a dense cloud of dust. 122: Escape This was their chance to escape! With all the stirred-up dust, it was the perfect opportunity to flee. But Kawao didn¡¯t know where to go, so he ran randomly away from the tower. If we can put enough distance between us and them, we might escape! he thought. Suddenly, he bumped into someone and fell to the ground. Sordo slipped from his shoulder but remained unconscious. Kawao quickly got back on his feet. The dust was beginning to clear, and he could make out the figure he had collided with¡ªit was one of the soldiers. The soldier wasted no time and lunged at Kawao with his spear. Thanks to his energy radar, Kawao managed to dodge. Soon, more soldiers appeared, closing in. Damn! We¡¯re surrounded! I need to defeat them quickly and escape before Feratu comes after us! Kawao spun his spear and took a quick look around. Eight soldiers surrounded them, with others likely not far behind. He took a deep breath and charged forward. With ease, he shattered the spears of his opponents and knocked them to the ground using the blunt end of his weapon. It only took a minute for the skirmish to end. Kawao then hoisted Sordo back onto his shoulders. Now or never! The dust was almost entirely settled, and he could already make out the silhouettes of more soldiers approaching. But it also allowed him to see a clear path to run without colliding with anyone else. Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. With a determined leap, he sprinted away. Breaking through the dust cloud, he reached the open plains surrounding the tower. The soldiers spotted him and began chasing, but they were no match for his speed. Soon, he was on the verge of leaving them far behind when a thunderous rumble echoed. With a deafening crash, Feratu emerged from the collapsed tower. Still in his jaguar form, his fiery eyes glared menacingly at Kawao. Without hesitation, Feratu leapt forward, pursuing the two at an incredible pace. Even with Stage One, Kawao wasn¡¯t fast enough to outrun him. In no time, Feratu appeared ahead, blocking their path. The tower was now a distant silhouette behind them. "This is the end for you!" Feratu roared. The tower¡¯s collapse had left him with only a few scratches. If I don¡¯t stop him now, we¡¯ll never make it out of here! Kawao channeled all his energy into his spear. Feratu leaped, his claws growing dramatically longer mid-air. "Claw Burst!" Kawao slid under him again, but this time, Feratu¡¯s claws managed to rake across his chest, leaving six deep wounds that bled profusely. But Kawao didn¡¯t let it slow him down. He turned around and, with all the strength left in his arm, hurled the spear at Feratu. As Feratu landed and turned to face him, he saw the spear¡ªbut too late. With full force, the spear pierced his left shoulder, embedding itself deeply. A deafening, agonized howl echoed across the plains of Kasaka that afternoon. While Feratu writhed in pain, Kawao kept running. As he sprinted, he focused his energy on his chest to stem the bleeding. It worked. Gradually, he picked up speed, putting more and more distance between himself and the soldiers. Soon, they wouldn¡¯t be able to catch him. Meanwhile, Feratu reverted to his human form and struggled to pull the spear from his shoulder. At that moment, the soldiers from the tower reached him. "Commander! What happened? Are you okay?" Feratu silenced the concerned soldier with a punch to the face, his eyes fixed on Kawao and Sordo as they escaped. "Shall we pursue them, sir?" "No. Let them go! They¡¯ll be caught soon enough. Help me get this spear out!" The soldiers finally noticed the spear impaling their commander¡¯s shoulder. After several minutes, they managed to remove it, and the bloodied spear rolled onto the ground. "Which direction are they headed?" Feratu asked, panting heavily from the ordeal. "North, sir!" "North? That leads to Kunkan¡ªthe city of Furo, that weakling! ... Fine. Until I recover, he¡¯ll ensure they don¡¯t leave the city. Then I¡¯ll deal with them myself and snuff out their lights!" 123: A New Mission Meanwhile, in a land far to the west. In a hideout of the Church of Madness.
A tall man sat silently in his room, staring at his reflection in the mirror opposite him. He let out a deep sigh. The sound echoed long and high through the room before it eventually faded into silence. A mission awaited him. He knew he would have to leave soon. But his sigh wasn¡¯t because of the task ahead. It was more about the charade he had to maintain during the mission. Suddenly, a sense of urgency overcame him. This was it. The moment he had been waiting for. The moment he feared. It was time to leave. His mission was to begin after one final discussion with his boss. Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon. With a heavy motion, he stood and shuffled toward the door, the barrier between the tranquility of his room and the merciless world outside. But he did not fear that world. No. He loved it. It was made for him, a dream among dreams, and yet ... He wasn¡¯t allowed to enjoy it. He sighed once more and exited the room. As he made his way through the hideout¡¯s corridors, he reflected on his situation. It felt as though he was seated at a banquet table with all the people of the world. While everyone else drank wine and feasted on fine meats, he was given only water and bread. In those moments, he felt betrayed by them. And he wondered if it wouldn¡¯t be better to strike out on his own. At that thought, a distinct clattering echoed through the corridors, drawing closer to him. For a moment, unease washed over him, knowing full well to whom that sound belonged. But the unease passed as he reminded himself that he had nothing to fear. That individual couldn¡¯t harm him. He was safe. Soon, he saw the figure approaching. It was massive. Almost twice his height, and he stood at 2.18 meters tall. The figure shuffled past him, swathed in layers of straitjackets that concealed its form. On its feet were heavy metal shoes, and its ankles were shackled with iron balls of immense weight. Its eyes were obscured by a black cloth made of a special material, and the rest of its face was clamped by a leather muzzle crafted from the hide of a creature that had long since vanished from Ea. Despite all these restraints, the giant moved as though exhausted, searching for another place to sleep. He knew this was indeed the case. And he knew exactly who this giant was. But now was not the time to dwell on it. He had a task to attend to. Moments later, he arrived before his boss. He knelt and listened intently as his mission was outlined. It was an important task. Its success or failure could alter the future of the entire world. Though, in a way, so could all his missions. And so, he set off to fulfill this one as well. 124: A Feeling of Danger At the same time, in a land far to the east
He woke up with a start. Before he knew it, he was sitting upright in his bed. What was this strange feeling? For years, his dreams had been peaceful. He had never experienced a nightmare, and now... ...he had been jolted awake by what felt like a foreboding sense of doom. When was the last time he had felt this? He thought for a moment but immediately knew the answer. So why was he even questioning it? Was he afraid? He, of all people? The feeling, the one he hadn¡¯t experienced in 15 years, was unmistakable. It was danger¡ªimminent danger. And not just any danger. In the very moment he stood up abruptly, he knew what he had to do. Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings. Without hesitation, he got dressed and left his room, resolute. He knew his task. Within moments, he arrived at his destination¡ªa small living room with an attached kitchenette. Inside were two people. One sat on a couch reading a magazine. The other was making coffee, even though they didn¡¯t own a coffee machine. When he entered the room, the person with the coffee turned around. They now held a steaming hot cup in hand. ¡°What¡¯s going on? Up so early today?¡± they greeted him, sipping their coffee casually. ¡°I had... ...that feeling.¡± The person gave him a puzzled look. ¡°That feeling of danger! It woke me up! It was the same feeling I had 15 years ago, right before we met!¡± ¡°What are you talking about? Are you not fully awake yet?¡± ¡°Oh, I¡¯m wide awake! And I¡¯m telling you right now what I¡¯m going to do. I¡¯m going back to the mainland to make sure this feeling doesn¡¯t come true, just like last time!¡± The person suddenly grew quiet and serious. ¡°Do you even know what you¡¯re saying? Going back to the mainland? To the place where they both despise and revere us? And for what? A feeling you had a few minutes ago?¡± ¡°We swore an oath! To ensure that it doesn¡¯t happen again!¡± ¡°But to risk everything we¡¯ve built over the past 15 years... ...for a feeling?¡± ¡°Yes! For this feeling! For this premonition! To protect the peace we gave everything¡ªsacrificed everything¡ªto achieve!¡± With that, he turned and left the room. The person watched him leave with a scowl. ¡°Don¡¯t expect us to help you if you screw things up,¡± they muttered under their breath. The person on the couch hadn¡¯t looked up from the magazine the entire time, sitting still as a statue. Without wasting any more time, he grabbed his Nyd¡ªa silver pendant in the shape of a small sword¡ªslung it around his neck, and left the house. He glanced back briefly before looking westward, where the mainland lay. And with a deafening boom, he launched himself into the air, flying west. Toward his premonition. 125: What the Future holds At the same time, in the capital city of Kasaka, Kaisan
Once again, a meeting of the Council of the Eternal Flame was convened. This time, the agenda focused on the general events occurring in the southern regions of the country. As usual, it was Fintei, the Minister of Defense, who opened the session for which everyone had been summoned. ¡°You all know why you¡¯re here, and I know most of you don¡¯t want to be, so let¡¯s get started! We already discussed the events in Kurani last time, so we¡¯ll skip that for now since you¡¯ve all done your part there. ... Let¡¯s move on to the situation in Cruscrax. It seems that citizens and soldiers have been disappearing there for some time now. This isn¡¯t a situation the army can handle alone. What do we do?¡± For a moment, there was silence. Then Dracko broke it: ¡°I could send a few scholars or even my bodyguard here. They could at least figure out what we¡¯re dealing with and perhaps even resolve it.¡± This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it ¡°That sounds promising! Hitto, you should send some doctors along as well, and together with Verbo from the 18th Unit, who is already stationed there, they should be able to handle it.¡± He was pleased to have one task settled. Usually, getting the council members to act was a challenge. But they understood what was at stake, so their cooperation wasn¡¯t too surprising. He shuffled through a stack of papers in front of him until he found what he was looking for. ¡°Next, we have news from the factory! They report they¡¯re on the verge of a breakthrough. In one to two months, they should have a functional prototype ready!¡± The council perked up immediately. This project had been a cornerstone of their operations since they took on their current roles. In an instant, everyone was visibly elated. Fintei allowed them a moment to celebrate before moving on to the final item on the agenda. ¡°Finally, we have an incident to address, which occurred at the crossroads north of Kurani. It seems Feratu was severely injured by the individual responsible for the Kurani incident!¡± The mood in the room shifted sharply from celebratory to serious. ¡°The individual, Kawao, fled north toward Kunkan. Feratu reported this just minutes ago. Although their communication device was damaged during the fight, they managed to repair it quickly. The tower at the crossroads collapsed during their brief battle. There were a few injuries, but Feratu suffered the worst of it.¡± ¡°Do we know Kawao¡¯s target yet?¡± ¡°Not yet. But judging by his movements so far, he appears to be heading north.¡± ¡°Could he be aiming for the factory?¡± ¡°Or perhaps for us? Kaisan?¡± A burst of loud chatter erupted. ¡°SILENCE!!!¡± Fintei bellowed, restoring order to the room. He hated having to raise his voice, but there was no other choice. ¡°We know he is currently in Kunkan! He was also injured in the fight, so he¡¯ll undoubtedly stay there for some time. I say we take this opportunity to deal with him once and for all before he becomes too dangerous!¡± With this decision, the Council of the Eternal Flame set in motion a series of events that would entangle Kawao in significant turmoil in the near future. End of Arc 2: Kurani 126: Journey to Kunkan Part 1 Saturday, 06.06.2364
It was a peaceful morning. Apart from a few clouds and a light breeze, there seemed to be nothing to worry about. Their simple wagon, pulled by a firehorse, rattled gently along the southern road. This was a transport wagon of the Kasakan army. A dark red cloth covered the part of the wagon in which they were seated. On both sides, the proud emblem of Kasaka was displayed: a black-and-red flame encircled by two phoenixes. They had been traveling in this wagon for about five days now. Since completing his recruit training in the capital, this was his first field deployment. He and the others from his class were headed far south to the city of Kunkan, where they would serve under Commander Funo for a time. Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings. Today, they were finally due to arrive. ¡°So, San? Still nervous about being so far from the capital for the first time?¡± one of his comrades asked. ¡°A little. Mostly, I¡¯m curious about the garrison and the commander. You¡¯ve all heard the rumors, haven¡¯t you?¡± ¡°Of course, we have! We¡¯re not suicidal!¡± ¡°Exactly! As long as we follow his orders and don¡¯t stand out, we have nothing to worry about!¡± Everyone else agreed with that. The rumors surrounding Funo, the commander of the 20th Unit, weren¡¯t exactly pleasant. Allegedly, he had complexes related to his older sister, which gave him a notoriously short temper. His sister was the personal protector of the Minister of Health and enjoyed high esteem throughout the country, primarily because of her powerful healing Nyd. But supposedly, this led to high expectations being placed on Funo as well, which he allegedly couldn¡¯t handle, resulting in an incident that was said to have been covered up by the ministers. Of course, these were just rumors, but many soldiers who had served under him reported that he would punish those who defied him or thought they were better than him. Everyone in the wagon knew they would have to be extremely cautious in his presence if they wanted to avoid suffering cruel punishment. 127: Journey to Kunkan Part 2 After a while, they reached the city. Though it was only about half the size of Kurani in the south, it was at least just as busy. The city was primarily known for its historical significance. In addition to many ancient buildings and landmarks, it also housed the only museum in the entire country. This earned the city its name: "The City on the Edge of Time."
The wagon was set to drop them off directly in front of the garrison, marking the end of their long journey. In the final minutes, they discussed the reason for their deployment. ¡°What do you think we¡¯ll be doing here?¡± This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon. ¡°Probably just patrolling or something. Most new recruits get sent here, don¡¯t they?¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. ... But do you think we might get a special assignment or something?¡± Some began to laugh. ¡°Yeah, right. First day on duty and you¡¯re already getting a special assignment. What¡¯s it going to be? Tracking down rebels in their hideout?¡± ¡°No. I just meant, maybe there¡¯s something extra we could do to prove ourselves.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think so. They probably just want to see if we can follow orders and stay out of trouble. What more could there be?¡± ¡°Maybe we¡¯ll still find a way to prove ourselves.¡± ¡°Better not, or we¡¯ll end up drawing the commander¡¯s wrath!¡± At that moment, the wagon came to a halt. ¡°We¡¯re here!¡± called the driver, who had put up with them for the entire journey. They grabbed their bags, containing their few necessary belongings, and climbed out. They stood before the open gates of a magnificent building. It almost looked like a small palace, surrounded by spacious grounds where soldiers trained or enjoyed their leisure time. Naturally, the entire facility, like all other garrisons, was completely fenced off and constantly guarded. Chances were, this task would soon fall to them as well. As they entered, San caught a glimpse out of the corner of his eye of the civilians outside the grounds. They looked at him with fear¡ªand a small hint of hatred. 128: The Garrison of Kunkan The rooms and hallways of the garrison were as opulent inside as its exterior was beautiful. Chandeliers hung in the rooms, and ceiling murals from a long-forgotten era adorned the corridors. San and the others could hardly believe that this was supposed to be a garrison building for the army. Compared to this, even the army headquarters in Kaisan¡ªwhich was itself an enormous and breathtaking complex¡ªwas nothing.
With mouths agape, they walked through the halls, drawing laughter from some of the soldiers passing by. "Impressed, are you?" someone asked them. They stopped briefly. "You should be. This building dates back to the time before the Nyd. It''s at least 300 years old. We don''t know exactly what happened back then or what purpose this building served, but it seems like life was better for people back in those days, don''t you think?" If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. San found this an intriguing question. While most of the others simply nodded absentmindedly and continued walking, he pondered whether life really was worse now than during the pre-Nyd era. As he mused, he gazed at a wall painting depicting a battle between humans, angels, and demons. "San! Are you coming?" his comrades called out behind him. He quickly snapped out of his thoughts and ran to catch up with them. They didn¡¯t want to risk being late for their meeting with the commander.
A few minutes later, they arrived at the commander¡¯s office. It was their duty to report to their superior officer immediately upon arrival. In their case, that was now him. Just as San was about to knock, the door swung open, and a tall man with a full beard and a long black leather coat stepped out. He gave San and the other recruits a stern, grim look before walking away. They watched him for a brief moment when¡ª "COME IN!" At the sound of the voice from inside, they hurried through the door and lined up in front of the commander¡¯s desk. Seated on the other side in a large leather armchair, the commander had his back turned to them. He spoke in an irritated tone: "Who are you? What do you want?" "We¡¯re the new recruits from Kaisan! Reporting for duty, Sir!" they shouted in unison. "The new recruits?" At that, he turned to face them, his expression dark and clearly annoyed. "It¡¯s about time! Took your sweet time getting here, didn¡¯t you?" 129: Report at Funo, Commander of the 20th Unit Resting his head on one arm with an irritated expression, he scrutinized the new recruits one by one. "I expected you here much earlier!" At those words, everyone flinched slightly. Were they about to face punishment from the commander? "You should have shown up much earlier and freed me from that guy!" They sighed in relief. But wait¡ªwho was he talking about? The person who had left the room just before they entered? Were they supposed to save him from that tedious conversation, even though they had no idea what had transpired? "Just barges in here and chews MY ear off. Ugh. I have much better things to do than sit here for hours listening to the rambling of that idiot. Just because some minister sent him, he thinks he''s something special!" Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit. He was genuinely annoyed¡ªeveryone was thinking the same thing at that moment. At the same time, none of them knew how to respond. Was their new commander just a lazy bastard? The man stood up. Once again, the recruits flinched. "Well, whatever. Ugh. I suppose I shouldn¡¯t judge you too harshly... not yet, anyway. That¡¯s why I¡¯m going to give you an important first piece of advice if you want to serve under me!" They listened closely. "My doors are always open. Even if the Emperor himself stands in my office¡ªif you can save me from this kind of nonsense, I¡¯ll forgive you!" he said, wearing an unexpectedly serious expression. At that moment, they all came to the same conclusion: he was indeed just lazy. He simply wanted to avoid work and be left in peace. None of them knew what to say in response¡ªexcept San. "Understood, sir!" he replied, slightly hesitantly. Funo noticed this. It seemed he had been waiting for someone to respond, and although only one recruit had done so, he was satisfied. He turned his back to them and gazed calmly out the window. After a while, he spoke again. "Even if it doesn¡¯t look like it, we¡¯ve got quite a lot on our plate right now. A troublesome incident is disrupting the peace of my beautiful city. You¡¯ll be helping to ¡®resolve¡¯ it as well. But for now, you¡¯re dismissed. Settle into the barracks and do whatever you like. Stay on the grounds or explore the city. Tomorrow, you¡¯ll receive your first missions. And now... dismissed!" "Understood!" they replied in unison before leaving the office. None of them said a word until they were back in the barracks. 130: The Garrison鈥瞫 Quarters The barracks of the garrison, of course, matched the grandeur of the rest of the building. Ornate furniture, carpets, and another magnificent ceiling painting adorned their quarters. The entire complex contained four such barracks, each with enough space for 50 people. One of these quarters, however, was reserved for recruits. They were expected to settle in during their first few days and move to the other barracks within a week.
San was once again staring at a painting, this time the ceiling mural in their quarters. It depicted a fountain of darkness erupting from the ground and a dark swordsman standing against it. "Do you think these paintings are just fantasy artwork, or do they really depict actual events? What do you all think?" The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. The others were still unpacking. San had already finished long ago. While they had been chatting, he had efficiently set up his space. "Huh? No idea! Do you really think that¡¯s supposed to be based on real events? Are you dumb?" "No, I¡¯m just saying¡ªwho knows what Ea was like before Nyd appeared?" "We can go to the museum later! I¡¯m sure the staff there will pat you on the head and tell you it¡¯s true, just to make you feel better. Meanwhile, they¡¯ll laugh at your childish imagination behind your back." Everyone burst out laughing. Though San generally got along well with the others, he sometimes felt like he was only there to be the "class clown." "Anyway¡­ are we exploring the city as a group or on our own?" "I¡¯d say as a group. It¡¯s definitely more fun together." "Yeah, I think so too." "Same here!" "Count me in!" They quickly agreed on their group size and began discussing their plans. "First, we need to get some real food. I¡¯m sick of that tavern slop we¡¯ve been eating for days!" Everyone agreed on that. Afterward, they decided to head to the museum and explore the city further along the way. 131: The Center of Kunkan Dressed in simple everyday clothing, San and his group wandered through the streets of Kunkan. The only indication that they were part of the army was the armbands they wore, which were exclusive to members. These ensured they could be easily located in case of an emergency. On the armband, beneath the country¡¯s emblem¡ªtwo phoenixes encircling a black and red flame¡ªwas a small heat signal. In an emergency, it would activate, and they would feel its warmth. But today, they were just exploring the city. After asking around at the garrison, they had been recommended a good restaurant in the city center. As they left the grounds, San once again noticed the way people around them cast wary and slightly resentful glances their way. Everyone, that is, except for an elderly man sitting on a nearby bench. He seemed lost in thought. San decided not to dwell on it.
After about ten minutes, they reached the center of Kunkan. This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source. Surrounded by restored antique buildings was a square that looked like it belonged in a fantasy story. The ground was adorned with colorful stones, and beautifully maintained green and red shrubs complemented the design. They quickly found the restaurant, KohleRaben, which was known for serving the best charred game meat in the area¡ªa local delicacy. Despite being charred, the meat had a sweet flavor. Beneath its crunchy exterior was always tender, juicy beef that filled the palate with rich taste. None of them had tried it before, but it sounded almost too good to be true. They were seated on the balcony on the first floor, which, to their surprise, was available. While waiting for their food, San gazed down at the square. He still saw bitter and frightened expressions on the faces of the townspeople. He wondered why that was. Then he noticed something about the square itself. Something caught his eye, and he froze. Just then, the waiter arrived with their orders. Noticing San¡¯s startled expression, the waiter smiled. "So, you¡¯ve noticed it too, have you?" The others, curious, followed San¡¯s gaze and did the same. From their vantage point, the pattern on the square became clear. It depicted a massive, blood-soaked figure striking the ground with a colossal club inlaid with twelve glowing gemstones. "This is the legacy of our city," the waiter explained kindly. "This is where the First War of the Lost came to an end! Every new recruit in this city sees this and is taken by surprise all over again." "But no one really knows what happened back then, during the very first of all wars." 132: The Portal to the Past They all walked the streets of the city deep in thought. The mosaic on the square had shown them just how bloody their history was, especially in the distant past. What the waiter had told them was true. During their training, they¡¯d had some history lessons, but they had learned almost nothing about the First War of the Lost. The country of Kasaka was only founded during the Second War, so it was deemed unimportant to teach them about events before its establishment. After this realization, the waiter had advised them to head straight to the museum, where they would gain a proper understanding. So, they were on their way. San continued thinking about the people of the city. Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon. Was this why the townsfolk seemed slightly disdainful toward them? Because it was obvious they were new and didn¡¯t know the history that predated Kasaka¡¯s founding? It didn¡¯t quite make sense to him. Likely, it didn¡¯t make sense to the others either. But it still didn¡¯t explain why the townspeople seemed so fearful of them. Maybe they¡¯d find out at the museum. The museum was located at the northern edge of Kunkan and was the largest building in the city. You could even see it from the city center. Like a monumental temple of history, the massive structure rose from the ground. Spread over four floors, it housed the history of the land and beyond. Priceless artifacts, works of art, and irreplaceable cultural treasures were secured within its walls, safe from greedy hands. A grand staircase led them to the entrance, flanked by massive marble columns that left them all in awe. Just before they reached the top, someone addressed them. ¡°Impressive, isn¡¯t it? It¡¯s meant to show newcomers how small they are in comparison to the mighty and magnificent history they¡¯re about to witness.¡± Standing at the entrance was a small, elderly man, leaning heavily on a cane to keep himself upright. ¡°Welcome, newcomers! To the Museum of Kunkan¡ªor, as we call it, the Portal to the Past!¡± 133: The Director of the Museum, Munkan They looked at the old man with puzzled expressions. ¡°Who are you?¡± they asked. He appeared shocked but quickly regained his composure. Angrily, he replied, ¡°I am the director of this museum and a professional archaeologist! Munkan!¡± The group was visibly surprised, nearly tumbling back down the long staircase they had just climbed. Although Munkan leaned on a cane, it seemed he didn¡¯t actually need it. He abruptly tossed it aside and strode toward the entrance. At the doors, he stopped and glanced back. ¡°What are you waiting for? I will personally guide you! Just as I do with all other newcomers!¡± With that, he entered the building. Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website. The group exchanged glances and quickly followed him inside.
The interior was a large, nearly empty hall. Where they had expected history to leap out at them, there was only an empty expanse. The only features were a sizeable reception desk and two doors. One of the doors opened, and a small group of visitors stepped into the room. They seemed visibly shaken, as though unsure how to process what they had seen in the museum. San watched them briefly as they approached the reception desk, only to be surprised¡ªno one was sitting there. ¡°Welcome to our humble house of knowledge! Here, we strive to convey as much as possible about the history of our nation,¡± Munkan began. ¡°In case you¡¯re wondering why no one is here¡­ Well, that¡¯s because we rarely have visitors!¡± ¡°What? But this is the largest museum in the country! How can it be lacking visitors?¡± ¡°There are several reasons for that,¡± Munkan explained. ¡°For one, nearly all the research we conduct here, along with the building and security measures, is funded by the army. Not everyone wants to visit what feels like a prison of history. On top of that, some of our exhibits are displayed under such strict precautions that most visitors leave with an uneasy sense of fear.¡± Suddenly, the group felt a slight chill run down their spines. What could they expect here? Munkan led them to one of the two doors¡ªthe one that had remained locked until now. ¡°Across four floors, we offer exhibits covering the various time periods of Kasaka¡¯s history and even beyond. We¡¯ll start with the exhibition on the Third War of the Lost up to the present day.¡± He opened the door, revealing a simple elevator inside. 134: The Beginning of the last War and the Arrival of the King The elevator took them to the top floor within minutes. When the doors opened, they were greeted by an extraordinary sight. Many rooms¡ªsome larger, some smaller¡ªoffered glimpses into the last few decades of their history. ¡°We¡¯ve collected pictures, artifacts, and even Nyds from many historical moments here! But before I start philosophizing too much, let¡¯s begin our little tour.¡± Calmly, Munkan led them into a medium-sized room where several documents and paintings were displayed. ¡°Let¡¯s start our journey through the last war at its very beginning! We¡¯re in the year 2331. At the end of the Second War, a non-aggression treaty was drawn up for 40 years. For the most part, those years remained peaceful. But as soon as that treaty expired, the four nations began to spy on each other. Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions. When exactly this started remains unclear. However, in that same year, one of these spies¡ªa Luvtanian spy¡ªwas discovered and executed in Nagasa by its then-ruler. This event sparked disputes between the two nations, which quickly escalated into skirmishes and eventually full-blown battles. Over the following months, the other two nations were drawn into the conflict as well.¡± He pointed to a painting depicting the former ruler of Nagasa impaling the Luvtanian spy on a trident. ¡°On these copies of the non-aggression treaty, we¡¯ve marked the clauses that were first violated and documented the events that led to their breach. Like its predecessors, this last war erupted very quickly.¡± After a few minutes, they moved on. They entered a small, blue-painted room where an enormous painting dominated one wall. ¡°The year 2339! By this point, the war had been raging for eight years. This event, however, is still regarded as a significant turning point to this day: The arrival of the King of the High North! Near the cliffside city of Sainoda (Eroden)¡ªwhere a battle between all four nations was underway¡ªhe reached the mainland aboard his Viking ship. As he approached, clouds gathered, and a storm broke out. He quickly drew the attention of the warring armies. It seemed as though the thunder and lightning were announcing his arrival. Standing at the bow of his ship, he leaped into the raging waters. Like a bolt of lightning, he stormed into the city, conquering it single-handedly within minutes. This moment is captured in this painting!¡± The painting showed a massive lightning strike hitting Sainoda, with the king''s ship visible on the stormy sea just offshore. 135: Tales from the third War of the Lost Shortly after, they moved on. They walked as if they weren¡¯t supposed to ask questions but only to listen. San didn¡¯t think much of it at first. Experiencing history in this form felt quite fascinating to him. They entered a large room filled with more paintings and wax figures. ¡°Two years later, in 2341, the mercenary uprising began. While many viewed them as mere tools of war, they were¡ªand still are¡ªavoided and hated by the majority of the population. They are seen as unable to adapt and as the embodiment of disgrace. ¡­ That¡¯s why they were treated like scum for years. And perhaps it was this treatment that led them to start a rebellion. They appeared on multiple battlefields and dominated them in mere moments. The Judge, The Thousand-Slayer, Iron Menace, Lucky Boy, and The Shapeshifter took control and led all the mercenaries far to the east. Far from the continent, on an archipelago of islands, they established their own state, which exists to this day: the Mercenary Lands.¡± The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. The pictures and figures in this room depicted the mercenaries he named and their actions on the continent''s battlefields. Without being allowed to ask questions, they moved on. Next, they entered a hallway adorned with more paintings, at the end of which lay a document encased in glass. ¡°In 2344, much had changed. Most of the mercenaries were gone. The King of the North, who had transformed the city of Sainoda into a neutral harbor after receiving it upon his arrival, had by then formed many alliances and friendships. And yet, he remained uninvolved in the war. For this reason, the four nations came to an agreement. Someone with such power shouldn¡¯t remain as an uncontested figure on the chessboard of war, even if he didn¡¯t want to participate. Someone with his capabilities was bound to choose a side eventually. So, they all united to attack his homeland in the north and told him that looters and pirates had taken advantage of his time away from home. Desperate, he sailed away, and while he was gone, the once-neutral city of Sainoda was razed to the ground. When he returned, he was overcome by an unnatural wave of rage. Somehow, he learned that the world had conspired against him. And so, he declared war on the entire continent of Unas.¡± They slowly walked down the hallway, examining the paintings as they passed. ¡°This war lasted for five years. Finally, in 2349, it culminated in a decisive battle. The rulers of the four nations faced him. But instead of defeating him, they and their armies were crushed. Just before he could execute them before the eyes of the world, salvation came. The mercenaries who had been exiled returned to fight him. With their unnatural abilities, they defeated him and erased his existence from the face of Ea. Shortly after, they made an agreement with the leaders of the world. After 18 long years, peace would finally prevail! And anyone who threatened this peace would have to face them! They declared this and recorded it in writing. Whenever a new war threatens to break out on Unas, they would return to prevent it! ¡­ It¡¯s been 15 years since then. And a slowly healing peace has indeed endured!¡± Finally, they observed the document encased in glass¡ªthe treaty of the last war. It bore the signatures of all the world¡¯s rulers. 136: The Coup of Kasaka Finally, they entered a wide room containing several displayed fragments of rubble. "Before we move on to the next floor, I must tell you about the most recent chapter in our history. You all witnessed it yourselves: the coup in Kasaka. When the former Emperor, Adaia the Second, launched an attack on his own capital alongside the military of the time, he nearly destroyed the nation that his father had built. He did this because of his severe mental disorders, which, according to the Council of Ministers, he developed after the Third War of the Lost. The military of that era was deeply loyal to him, and they followed him into his demise... ...which they did. Fortunately, the Council had secretly trained a special unit to counteract any coup attempt. This unit infiltrated the city and eliminated the old leaders of the military. Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. As for Adaia, it is said that in his suicidal madness, he took his own life. From his cold, lifeless hands, his son took his Nyd, inheriting it, and thus became the third ruler of our nation. At just 21 years old, he was burdened with the responsibility of leading an entire country. But the ministers supported and continue to support him, working tirelessly to prevent the collapse of our nation. ... And they succeeded. In the two years since, our country has not faced a collapse. The secret unit from back then now forms our current military, which you proudly and bravely serve! But you already knew that." After his brief explanation, they spent some time observing the rubble and reflecting on the memories it stirred. All of them had lived in the capital during that time and had witnessed terrible events. They signaled to Munkan that they would prefer to move on. He understood. He led them into a small staircase that took them one floor down. Once again, they found themselves in rooms of varying sizes, filled with artifacts and exhibits showcasing the older history of their nation. This era was one they had learned relatively little about. They knew that during this time, their country had been founded and built, but beyond that, their knowledge was sparse. "Now then! Let us continue our journey! I shall now teach you about the partly forgotten Second War of the Lost! Starting with its beginning in the year 2265!" 137: The Foundation of Kasaka The first room they entered was about the beginning of the Second War of the Lost. Aside from a few paintings and writings, there wasn¡¯t much to see, so they continued listening to Munkan¡¯s explanations. "We are in the year 2265. Eighty years after the First War, the nations of Eroden and Nagasa had recovered and were living in peace. But in the recent years, a third nation, Luvtan, had begun to take shape. The other two nations saw this as a threat. Why was it founded? Did they want war? Did they seek world domination? ¡­ From these questions and fears, the first battles arose, which grew more intense and violent over the next ten years. And so, out of an unfounded fear of a non-existent threat, the Second War of the Lost began." They followed him further. A fiery red room lay before them, displaying relics from the early days of Kasaka. The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. "Thirteen years later, in the year 2278, our nation was founded. Adaia the First, who was still active as a mercenary at the time, was a feared monster on the battlefields of his era. But when this monster one day reached the village of Kasaka and experienced the kindness and compassion of its people, his heart softened. He decided to abandon his mercenary life and protect this village. He quickly gathered powerful allies, and within just six years, he built his own nation where people could live safely, away from the war. After four more years, Kasaka became one of the most powerful countries in the world, where merely the mention of Adaia¡¯s name was enough to deter enemies. In ten years, a simple village had transformed into an empire¡ªone that has now existed for eighty-six years." They paused for a moment in the room, gazing in awe at the paintings of Adaia the First, who raged over his enemies like a dragon. Shortly after, they moved on to a completely white, almost empty room. Except for a few yellowed pages, there was nothing else. "Now, I will tell you about the origins of the one who ended the Second War of the Lost. The origins of the Martial God." 138: The Martial God "The Martial God?" "Who is that supposed to be?" "I''m getting to that now!" A short, almost awkward silence followed. Munkan cleared his throat. "The Martial God was the title given to the one who, through his actions, ended the Second War of the Lost. ¡­ We don¡¯t know much about him. To be honest... we don¡¯t even know how old he was! What we do know is that he was first mentioned in the year 2277. At the time, he participated in a battle between Eroden and Luvtan¡ªas a mercenary. He was described as an odd person, behaving as if he had witnessed violence for the first time in his life. ¡­ After that, he was seen on the battlefields from time to time over the next three years, but he never gave off an impression of being particularly strong. Then, three years later, reports emerged that he suddenly wielded three extremely powerful Nyds and began dominating battles. From that point on, he only intervened in fights as much as necessary¡ªto end them. This continued for eight more years, until... In the year 2291, he suddenly began killing everyone. The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. By then, battles were already becoming less frequent, but he actively sought them out, slaughtering anyone who crossed his path. To this day, we still can¡¯t explain why he had such a drastic change of heart. Fearing that he might soon set his sights on their nations, the four great countries at the time formed an alliance to destroy him. With their combined forces, they managed to defeat him. His Nyds were split apart and distributed among the nations. That moment of triumph was taken to heart, and the leaders signed a non-aggression pact, promising forty years of peace... But, as we know, that promise was eventually broken, leading once again to war." Munkan turned around and continued walking, saying nothing more. The others followed him in silence. They approached another elevator. As the doors closed, San had a question. "What happened to the Nyds of the King of the North?" Munkan paused briefly, but then answered without turning around. "He possessed six Nyds. Three of them were cast into the sea, where his homeland once stood. The other three were seized by the mercenaries. As for what became of them... we have no idea."** The elevator came to a stop. As they stepped out, Munkan halted for a moment. "What became of his power is of no consequence. But what I am about to tell you now¡ªis. The legends and myths of the First War of the Lost¡ªa war known only to scholars and historians!" 139: Stories from the First War of the Lost The entire floor consisted of a single long corridor that led into a large room, which then opened into another corridor on the opposite side. They walked slowly along it, continuing to listen to Munkan. "As you have surely heard before, Nyd first arrived on Ea in the year 2154¡ªexactly 210 years ago. However, the First War of the Lost did not begin until ten years later. What happened between these two events? We don¡¯t know. We have learned nothing from the time before the First War. We have a few theories, but I will get to those later. What we do know is that the war began when an unknown military force used Nyd to try and seize control of Ea. This plunged the world into chaos and despair. It wasn¡¯t until seven years later that the land of Eroden was founded¡ªto provide refuge for those fleeing the war. We also don¡¯t know who this unknown force was fighting before Eroden was established. ¡­ However, we do know that ten years after the founding of Eroden, the land of Nagasa was established¡ªafter its first ruler discovered his Nyd." Throughout the corridor, paintings and drawings hung on the walls, depicting the few known events from the First War. Among them was a painting of a mountain collapsing onto an army, and another of a massive whirlpool near a fishing village that swallowed entire warships. This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it. Then, they entered the large room on the floor. This space was dedicated entirely to one person. "The Hero of the First War! Unfortunately, we know almost nothing about him... Only that he was once part of the military force that started the war. Later, he betrayed them and single-handedly wiped them from the face of Ea. Shortly afterward, he challenged the rulers of Nagasa and Eroden to battle. That was in the year 2185. He was killed by the two rulers, which ushered in a new era of peace¡ªone where Nyd was to be seen as a part of life, not just a weapon. That is why we have kept a piece of his Nyd here!" Munkan pointed to the center of the room. There, inside a glass case, lay a massive war club, with twelve slots carved into it. "This was his weapon. It once held twelve Nyds, which granted him immense power. But, unfortunately, these Nyds were stolen long ago. During the last war, the King of the North tried to steal this very weapon¡ª But he failed!" "How is that possible?" one of them asked. "Only the First Hero was able to wield this weapon. Anyone else who tries is rejected. It is impossible to lift unless you are him." Shortly after, they continued into the final corridor. More paintings lined the walls, depicting the First Hero in battle, and eventually, his defeat. Then, they entered the final elevator. This one led them to a last room. Aside from a few scattered drawings, the room was nearly empty. Munkan turned to them. "Finally, I will share with you a few theories we have developed¡ª about the time before Nyd ever existed!" 140: A Time before Nyd "In this room, we have outlined all our theories about the Pre-Nyd Era. We have almost no information about this time, but during our travels across Unas, we have discovered various cave paintings hidden deep within Ea. These paintings depict massive cities with tower-like buildings and self-moving vehicles. We suspect that the First War robbed us of this technology, setting us back decades, if not centuries. Additionally, we found paintings of winged creatures and shadowy monsters. We also cannot determine exactly how old these paintings are. But one thing stood out to us as particularly interesting. Among the monsters, there was a human figure in a full-body suit. And this suit looked shockingly similar to that of a very particular individual¡­ ... It was exactly the same suit that the strongest mercenary on Ea wore until the end of the last war. Many, many years ago, Suido already existed. Or¡­ it may have been one of his ancestors. Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more. However, we have eyewitness reports from many elderly individuals who claim to have seen him in his current form over 70 years ago!" "Over 70 years? Are you saying...?" "We cannot say for certain¡­ But it is possible that Suido has been alive for over 100 years¡ªor longer¡ªon Ea¡­ And that he does not age. ¡­ However, we cannot confirm this, as he has been missing for the last 14 years!" A deep, eerie silence filled the room. "The year is now 2364. And we know almost nothing for certain about the world before 210 years ago. Unraveling the truth of what came before us¡ªthrough these 2000+ years of lost history¡ªis our task, our mission, and our life''s work!" With that, Munkan finally concluded his "short" tour. They exited through a hallway that led back to the museum''s entrance hall. After Munkan reminded them that they could return anytime to ask about specific historical events, they were ready to leave the Museum of Kunkan. "Wait a moment!" Munkan stopped them just before they could step outside. "I almost forgot to mention¡ªthere was a break-in here recently!" "Was anything stolen?" San asked. "No¡­ Luckily, nothing was taken¡­ But Commander Funo has already assured us that security will be increased! As a result, you will probably be dealing with this soon as well. I just wanted to give you a heads-up!" They nodded to him without a word and left. No one spoke as they descended the long staircase. The events of the First War and the theories before it gave them a lot to think about. They returned to the central plaza of the city and entered one of the caf¨¦s. Again, they chose a seat with a clear view of the plaza¡¯s mural, contemplating everything they had just learned. It took a while before someone finally spoke, and they began exchanging their thoughts on all they had discovered. 141: The old Tavern After their visit to the caf¨¦, they wandered through the city once again. They walked aimlessly through the streets, none of them quite sure where to go next. While the others didn¡¯t want to discuss the stories they had just learned, San had another idea to break the ice. "What do you guys think about that burglar? Do you really think we¡¯ll have to deal with him already?" The others slowly looked up. "I don¡¯t think so. We¡¯re still just recruits. There¡¯s no way they¡¯ll send us on a chase for some thief... ...especially if he didn¡¯t even steal anything." The others nodded in agreement. "But then why would Munkan even tell us about him?" "Maybe he just wanted to keep us in the loop? This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it. Who knows. He¡¯s a strange old man, obsessed with history. I doubt he¡¯s all there anymore." The others simply nodded. "Maybe you¡¯re right. Maybe I¡¯m just hoping for too much..." "Yeah, definitely. Why would a bunch of recruits with no real combat experience or Nyd abilities just suddenly get assigned some special mission and become heroes? San, I think you¡¯re still a few years behind in development." The others laughed. He did too. For a moment, it was as if they had forgotten the events of the museum. At least, for now...
Suddenly, they passed by an interesting building. They had wandered to the outskirts of the city without even realizing it. They had drifted off more than they thought. But despite that, this building caught San¡¯s attention. And yet... It wasn¡¯t anything special. Just a run-down old tavern with a hotel above it. The building itself looked old¡ªat least 50 years or more. The sign bearing the tavern and hotel¡¯s name was so dusty and rusted that it was completely unreadable. Without even realizing that the others had walked ahead, San slowly approached the building. Step by step, he moved closer. When he got close enough to see through the filthy windows, ... someone suddenly placed a hand on his shoulder and yanked him around. It was the large, grim-looking man who had left the commander¡¯s office earlier. He stared at him as if San had just committed a serious crime. 142: The Calculator The man''s gaze pierced through San like a beam of light. A light searching for answers. "Get lost!" he said sternly. "Wha... What?" "I SAID: GET LOST!" he shouted this time. It felt as if his shout had kicked up a small cloud of dust. "Who are you, and what do you want from us?" San''s comrades had returned after hearing the madman''s yell. The man turned casually toward them. He examined them carefully. "You really haven¡¯t heard of me?" he asked, now sounding curious. "Uh¡­ No? Should we know you?" A manic grin spread across his face. From San¡¯s angle, he could just barely see that something was written on the man''s teeth before he closed his mouth again. Had he drawn something on his teeth? You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story. The man let go of him, and San quickly ran back to the others. The lunatic now gave them a polite bow and formally introduced himself. "My name isn¡¯t important to most. But those who know me, or have heard of me, call me: The Calculator." "The Calculator?" they all repeated in unison. "The Guardian of the Ministry of Finance?" "The very same." "Oh my god, we had no idea!" "It¡¯s fine, I also mistook you for a client. So forgive my rough behavior earlier!" "No, no, it¡¯s all good. We should be the ones apologizing!" They awkwardly tried to apologize to each other when suddenly¡ª "Oh! That reminds me... Funo asked me to send you to him. Apparently, he has your first assignment." "Wait, weren¡¯t we supposed to have the day off?" "Well, yes, but as recruits of Kasaka, you always need to be ready. Funo won¡¯t admit it, but he actually feels bad about pulling you out of your free time. He hates working, you know? If it were up to him, he¡¯d rule over the most peaceful city in the world, just so he wouldn¡¯t have to do anything. ...Anyway, you need to go to him." The others nodded silently, and they all went their separate ways.
As San and the others walked back to the garrison, they continued talking about their encounter. "Was that really the Calculator?" "I think so. He was absolutely terrifying when he grabbed San." "Did he hurt you?" "No, I¡¯m fine. But for a moment, I really thought he was going to attack me." "I never expected him to have such a split personality." "Me neither. Especially not after everything people say about him." "Like what?" "Wait, you¡¯ve never heard? They say he¡¯s the Finance Minister¡¯s bloodhound. He hunts down every debtor in the country... and ¡®eases¡¯ their debt and taxes." They kept talking about their bizarre encounter until they finally reached the garrison.
Meanwhile, elsewhere in Kunkan... The Calculator grumbled to himself as he continued his mission through the streets. ¡®Damn recruits! They don¡¯t know a damn thing! Saying they didn¡¯t recognize me. They were just too scared to admit it! Damn amateurs!¡¯ 143: A new Mission The sun was already setting by the time they reached the garrison. Without any detours, they headed straight for Funo¡¯s office. Just as they arrived at the door, they heard voices from inside. They immediately recognized one of them¡ª It was the Calculator. Even though they had come straight from their encounter with him, somehow, he had arrived before them. They had thought he was on his own mission, yet here he was. Then, suddenly, they heard Funo shouting. That was all the excuse they needed¡ªthey decided to just walk in. As they entered, both men looked up at them. For a brief moment, they saw a glimpse of relief and joy on Funo¡¯s face. "As you can see, my people need me. So, I¡¯ll have to deal with your request later." The Calculator grunted and stormed off, irritated. This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience. With a look of pure disdain, he walked past San and the others, then slammed the door shut behind him. They all flinched at the sound. "Phew! Well done! You got me out of that mess. I have no idea why that crazy lunatic always has to come to me whenever he has a problem." ¡®Because you¡¯re the boss,¡¯ they all thought at the same time. "Ah, whatever. For now, let¡¯s focus. It¡¯s time for your first mission!" He clapped his hands together, getting straight to business. "You may have already heard the news on the streets¡ª yesterday, there was a break-in at the museum!" They all nodded, already aware of this. "As you probably know, this is the first break-in we¡¯ve had in years¡ª since the King of the North attempted his robbery! So, naturally, everyone is on edge and running wild." That was an understatement. Ever since they re-entered the garrison, they had noticed how chaotic everything was. Every available soldier was rushing around, preparing for an all-night citywide search for the intruder. "The first time in years that we¡¯ve had a problem, and it has to be THIS! And to top it all off¡ª HE DIDN¡¯T EVEN STEAL ANYTHING! HA! This guy is just testing himself, seeing if he can do it! ... I want that bastard standing right here in my office by the time the first rays of the sun hit the horizon! DO I MAKE MYSELF CLEAR?!" "YES, SIR!" "Good! You¡¯ll be patrolling the museum tonight! I doubt he¡¯ll be dumb enough to break in twice, but just in case¡ª I want you there! Stay alert! If you see him¡ª DON¡¯T let him escape! Now move!" They saluted, then left the office. Without hesitation, they rushed to their rooms to prepare. As they put on their uniforms, San¡¯s mind was racing. Who would be foolish enough to break into the museum twice? He couldn¡¯t think of an answer. And before he knew it¡ª They were already on their way back to the museum. 144: Night at the Museum As the sun disappeared beyond the horizon and the city plunged into uncertain darkness, San and the others arrived at the museum once again. Upon reaching the entrance, they found Munkan already waiting for them, his old, uncertain face set in a serious expression. "There you are!" he greeted them. "Come in! Funo has already informed me via a messenger flame." Together, they entered the building. At the reception desk, Munkan explained where each of them would be patrolling. "You three will watch the third floor. You three will take care of the second. My colleagues and I will cover the first floor. That leaves only you, San. You''ll have to watch over this floor alone. But don¡¯t worry. You only need to keep an eye on the storage room and the exhibition you were in earlier. That exhibition can be entered from three places: The reception hall, the elevator from the first floor, and the storage room over there. It has no windows or doors, but maybe our intruder will use Nyd and manage to slip in unnoticed!" "Are there really Nyds like that?" "Of course there are. For example¡ª" "Ahem!" A staff member quickly cleared his throat before Munkan could launch into another long story. "Oh. This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it. My apologies... Well then, let¡¯s get started." With that, everyone took their positions. San remained alone on his assigned floor as planned. Munkan handed him a key to lock and unlock the doors to the exhibition and storage room. He did just that. The lights in the building were left on that night. Usually, they were kept off. San took a brief moment to examine the exhibition before realizing how eerily silent it had become. He was the only one here. A slight shiver ran down his spine. Slowly, he turned to face the door leading to the storage room. With quiet steps, he approached it. A soft clicking sound signaled the door mechanism unlocking, followed by a faint creak as the door opened. He cautiously stepped inside. The room was pitch-dark. Wasn¡¯t the light supposed to stay on? Standing frozen in the doorway, he reached out with one hand, searching for the switch. It felt like an eternity, but then¡­ CLICK. The light flicked on, flooding the room with bright, reassuring light. But that wasn¡¯t what troubled him. For a brief moment, just as the light turned on, he spotted a figure through the shelves ahead. As soon as the light touched them, they hesitated¡ªthen bolted. It took San a moment longer to fully grasp what had just happened. "STOP RIGHT THERE!" he shouted, charging forward. He didn¡¯t know the storage room well, but that didn¡¯t matter. His body moved on instinct. Now and then, he caught glimpses of the figure darting between the shelves, vanishing down the aisles. He ran as if his life depended on catching that person. Then¡­ The unknown figure dashed around a corner. Out of the corner of his eye, San saw that it led to a dead end. "I''ve got you now!" he shouted, rushing around the corner. ¡­ But there was no one. Only a white wall and rows of shelves filled with various museum supplies. He quickly scanned the area, but the figure had vanished. As silence settled over the room, he took one last desperate look upward, hoping to catch a glimpse of them. But there was nothing. His head dropped in frustration. Then, someone placed a hand¡ªsoft and gentle¡ªon his shoulder. "So¡­ who¡¯s caught who now?" 145: The mad doctor The sweet, feminine voice giggled softly as San spun around in fright. Standing right in front of him was a rather short woman with blonde-red hair, dressed in a brilliantly white lab coat. With a slight grin, she gently pressed him back against the wall that was now behind him. "Wait. Wait. Hold on! J-just a m-moment!" San stammered. He recognized the woman almost instantly. Everyone in Kaisan would. Blonde-red hair, a lab coat, and glowing yellow eyes that sometimes seemed as if dark clouds were passing over them. She was the Guardian of the Ministry of Health! The mad doctor! The one rumored to dissect anyone she laid eyes on¡ªwhether dead or alive! "What¡¯s the matter? Am I too close? Does this make you uncomfortable?" she asked in a sweet, almost teasing tone as she slowly leaned in toward him. "W-w-well... A-a-actually, yes... S-soooo..." This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it "Tell me, boy... May I dissect you?" she cooed gently, pulling a scalpel from her coat and holding it up to his face. She slowly ran her tongue along the blade. At that moment, he managed to break free and ran as fast as he could. In his panic, he crashed straight into a shelf standing right in front of him. He tumbled to the ground but wasted no time scrambling up and dashing off in another direction. She simply watched him go, her expression turning to one of concern¡ªeven as she held the blade menacingly in her hand. "Stop running!" she called after him, beginning to follow. "You must have hurt yourself just now! Let me help you!" San, however, kept running. And running. And running. He had no idea where he was going. All that mattered was getting away from her. After what felt like an eternity, he finally saw it after rounding a corner¡ª The exit! The door had closed earlier, but he knew it wasn¡¯t locked. Just a few meters from his escape, someone suddenly opened the door. San froze in surprise¡ª Then, in sheer terror. The Calculator stepped into the room. But instead of blocking his path, he let him pass. As San rushed by, the man simply muttered, "Now you owe me, kid." Before San could respond, he was outside¡ª And the door slammed shut behind him. He finally stopped running, staring in horror at the now-closed door. He had no idea what to do next. So he took off again. Into the elevator. Up to the next floor. To warn the others. Meanwhile, the doctor stood before the Bloodhound. "Why are you stopping me? We¡¯re on the same team, aren¡¯t we?" she asked, raising the scalpel. "Yeah, we are. But that doesn¡¯t give you the right to jeopardize the mission," he shot back, cracking his knuckles. 146: The Price for Rescue After reaching Munkan and his colleagues on the first floor, San quickly told them what had happened downstairs. They all seemed unsettled, just as uncertain as he was. Still, Munkan decided they should go down together to investigate. When they arrived at the storage room, they found it partially destroyed. But the two guardians were gone. Munkan wasn¡¯t sure whether to believe San¡¯s story, so he sent him to the third floor for the rest of the night. There, San recounted everything to the others. They, too, found it hard to believe. The night passed, and as the first rays of sunlight reached the city, Munkan and his colleagues realized that¡ªonce again¡ªnothing had been stolen. Even in the wrecked storage room, everything was still there, albeit damaged. Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site. With that, Munkan dismissed them back to the garrison and set to work cleaning up the mess himself. On the way back, San couldn¡¯t think of anything else but how everyone must see him as crazy now. Maybe they were right. Maybe he had imagined the figure. But he was certain that the two guardians were real. Even if he was the only one who believed it. Until they arrived at the garrison. Because standing at the entrance, waiting for him, was the Calculator. As they got closer, he spoke. "You all can go ahead. I just need a quick word with your friend here." He pointed at San. The others exchanged surprised glances but quickly moved along onto the grounds. The Calculator looked at San with a grim expression. San was still afraid¡ªbut not as much as during their first encounter. "I''m here to collect your debt." "My debt?" "Yes! For saving you from that lunatic, you owe me!" "And what exactly do you have in mind?" For a moment, the two locked eyes in a dark, silent exchange. "100 coins." "Whaaaat?" "100 coins. Not a single one more or less." San had never expected this. His rescue had just been invoiced. "Can¡¯t pay?" the Calculator asked, slowly tensing up. "I can! I can! Here!" San flinched and quickly fumbled for his money. Luckily, he had 115 coins on him¡ªjust in case. He had never been so happy to have a little extra cash. He handed over the money, and the Calculator relaxed. "Good. Glad we understand each other," he said before turning and heading back into the city. San watched him go for a brief moment before realizing¡ª He still had to report to Funo. 147: The Commander鈥瞫 Madness Although he felt a lingering unease, San walked steadily through the temporarily quiet halls of the garrison, making his way toward Funo¡¯s office. Yet, the encounter with the Calculator still weighed on his mind. That man was a strange one. Charging money for everything he did. In that regard, he certainly lived up to his name. Moments later, San stood before Funo¡¯s office. He knocked briefly before stepping inside. Funo was seated with his back turned to him. "San?" "Yes, sir!" "I¡¯ve already heard about your encounter at the museum. That doctor is completely out of her mind. I already gave her hell for it. Not that it seemed to bother her." Slowly, he stood up and walked toward San. "I also heard you made contact with the Calculator. Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work! That guy is insane and paranoid¡ªno doubt about it. But there¡¯s one thing I can¡¯t help but wonder..." Now, he stood directly in front of San, staring deep into his eyes without blinking. "How is it that, on your very first day here, you¡¯re already causing such a stir? ¡­ You nearly caught the museum intruder. You got caught up in a fight between two Ministry guardians. And you seem to be forming some kind of connection with them. That makes me think, San. Are you trying to... steal my spotlight?" An uncomfortable silence filled the room. "What do you mea¡ª" "SILENCE!!! ... I¡¯m speaking now! ... I have a peaceful, quiet city under my command. Nothing has happened here for ten years. And that¡¯s exactly how it should stay. But suddenly, out of nowhere, events are starting to spiral out of control. So now I have to wonder... What role do you play in all of this? Are you just a background character? Or do you see yourself as the protagonist of these events, hmm?" ¡­ "Let me tell you something! ¡­ There is only one protagonist in this city! And that¡¯s me! I am the one who maintains peace and silence in this place! And that will not change because of you! Understood?" San was afraid. He had already suspected that Funo wasn¡¯t entirely sane, but this far exceeded his expectations. He only nodded silently. He could feel that Funo knew he had intimidated him. And that seemed to satisfy him, because he turned away. "I consider your report delivered. You are dismissed, recruit!" "Yes, sir!" With that, San left the room calmly. But the moment the door closed behind him, he nearly sprinted back to the barracks. He just wanted to crawl into bed and forget this night ever happened. 148: A New Day Sunday, 07.06.2364
San woke up with a headache. Not only had he gotten very little sleep, but he had also endured a particularly eventful night. And his last conversation with Funo had kept him awake the longest. Now, he was sure¡ªsomething was definitely wrong with that man. The rumors were true. As his comrades urged him to hurry up so they could report to Funo, he debated whether he should tell them. After a brief moment of thought, he decided he would. But first, he got himself ready for duty. Just as they were about to leave, he stopped them. "Wait a second! ¡­ I need to tell you something!" "Can¡¯t it wait until later?" "No. I think you should hear this now." And so, he told them everything that had happened after they had parted at the entrance to the garrison. He told them about the Calculator and his encounter with Funo. You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version. When he finished, the others looked visibly concerned. "Are you serious?" "Dead serious." "Damn¡­ So the rumors are true after all." "What do we do now?" "I think we should go to him as planned. As long as we play along with his plans and don¡¯t draw attention to ourselves, we should be fine." "You really think so?" "We have to go to him. No matter what. ¡­ Otherwise, he might start thinking we¡¯re traitors or something." They nodded at each other and set off. As they walked, they noticed the visible unease on the faces of the soldiers around them. It seemed like everyone had realized what Funo was like long before they had. Everyone in the garrison seemed afraid of him. And now they understood why. By the time they reached his office and stepped inside, they were more nervous than ever before. It felt like stepping into the lion¡¯s den. Funo was staring out of the window, speaking to them without even turning to face them. "You have the day off again. Tonight, you¡¯ll patrol the museum once more. The two guardians won¡¯t be there this time¡ªI promise. You are dismissed." Short and painless. That was all he had to say. They felt a wave of relief wash over them. After officially signing out, they left the garrison. Only once they were outside did they speak again. "Man, I was scared as hell!" "Me too." "Same here!" "That guy is seriously insane. Good thing we don¡¯t have to see him again today!" "You said it!" After a brief pause, San spoke up. "So¡­ what do we do until patrol?" "I was thinking of heading back to the marketplace." "I wanted to look for some new casual clothes." "I¡¯ll stay at the garrison." Everyone seemed to have their own plans. "Alright. Then let¡¯s meet at sunset at the museum entrance," San decided. No one objected. A moment later, they went their separate ways. San was about to head toward the tavern that had fascinated him so much the night before when he noticed a cloaked man sitting on a bench by the garrison fence. Something about him seemed strange. But San chose to ignore him. 149: The Burning Goblin Around midday, San reached the tavern. Just like yesterday, it stood there¡ªlonely and abandoned, as if built on the edge of existence itself. This time, no one would stop him. With determined steps, he approached the dusty veranda. Now that he was standing right in front of it, he could finally make out the tavern¡¯s name: "The Burning Goblin." A strange name, he thought. But he didn¡¯t let it bother him. Something about this building drew his attention. He couldn¡¯t help but feel the need to find out what it was that kept calling him here. He stepped onto the veranda. The wooden planks creaked and cracked beneath his feet as he made his way to the entrance. Just before stepping inside, he thought he heard a sound from within. A rattling? He ignored it and entered. Inside, it was even dustier than outside. The moment he stepped in, he started coughing from the thick, stale air. It¡¯s impossible for anyone to actually be in here, he thought. The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement. Yet, to his surprise, several patrons sat at the grimy tables. They were all older folk¡ªpeople who, he guessed, had probably been coming here for years. They looked at him with grim, mistrustful eyes. After taking a moment to observe his surroundings, he walked toward the bar. The entire tavern looked as though it had been cut out of another place and pasted here. He recalled hearing that there was a region in Eroden where designs like this were common. A dry, almost desert-like area. As he reached the bar, the bartender stepped forward. A tall, menacing-looking man with a thick scar across his face gave him a brief scowl. Then, out of nowhere, the man suddenly broke into a wide smile and spoke in an unexpectedly cheerful tone. "Good day, sir! What can I do for you on this fine day?" San was momentarily speechless. The man¡¯s appearance didn¡¯t match his personality at all. Still, he was too nervous to say that out loud. "I¡­ I was just in the area when I happened to notice this building. Something about it caught my attention, so I decided to come inside." "Wonderful! That makes me happy to hear! Would you like to learn more about this place?" "Sure. Why not?" "Why not, indeed! Well, this establishment was built by my father. Fifty years ago, he moved to Kunkan and created both his home and his business here¡ªa tavern with a hotel built above it. It was quite popular back in the day. Most of the guests you see here now have been regulars for decades." That explained the patrons. "Fifty years? That¡¯s quite a long time." "Isn¡¯t it? He built this place exactly ten years after Kunkan was founded. Speaking of which¡ª Were you at the recent anniversary celebration?" "No, I only arrived here yesterday." "Ah, what a shame. Anyway, ever since I took over the business five years ago, things have been quieter than they used to be¡­" At that, the mood dropped. "Would you perhaps like to stay for a night?" he then asked. "Oh. No, thank you. I already have accommodations. ¡­ Actually, I just remembered something important I need to take care of. If you¡¯ll excuse me." "Oh, of course! Naturally, naturally. I wish you a pleasant rest of your day." With that, San turned to leave. Just before stepping out of the tavern, he heard it again. A scratching sound. Like something being dragged across the wooden floor. It came from above. He hesitated for a moment. But after a brief pause, he decided to ignore it and continued walking back toward the garrison. 150: The Man on the Bench By the afternoon, when San reached the garrison, he noticed that the cloaked man was still sitting on the bench by the fence. That struck him as rather suspicious. Curious, he walked over and sat down beside him. "Good afternoon," the man greeted. "And to you as well," San replied. For a while, they sat in silence. Then San decided to speak. "Sorry for the question, but¡­ why have you been sitting here all day?" The man looked up briefly. "I like it here. The garrison is such a beautiful building. It feels like standing on the border between the rich and the poor." "What do you mean by that?" "Well, the soldiers in their garrison look like wealthy, noble people, while the citizens seem like impoverished, dirty peasants. ¡­ At least, that¡¯s how it appears to me. I hope I haven¡¯t offended you by saying that." San thought about his words for a moment. In a way, he had a point. It did feel a little like a divide between rich and poor. Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon. But it still felt wrong to him. That wasn¡¯t how he was raised. That wasn¡¯t how things were taught in the capital. "No, no. It¡¯s fine. I don¡¯t exactly agree with you¡­ But I appreciate that you can voice your opinion freely without being attacked for it." "Not everywhere is like that." "What do you mean?" "¡­ Be honest. When you first saw me sitting here, you thought I might be a spy watching the soldiers, didn¡¯t you?" San flinched slightly. The man was right. That thought had crossed his mind. "¡­ A little, yeah," he admitted, feeling ashamed. The man let out a hearty laugh. "Ha ha ha! I thought so! You formed an opinion about me without knowing me, and now you¡¯re trying to find out if your suspicion was right. Ha ha ha! I don¡¯t hold it against you. I probably would¡¯ve done the same¡­ But to put your mind at ease¡ªI¡¯m just a traveler. I come from Karuni. I used to work at the harbor there. But the constant presence of pirates in the area started making me question things. Do I really want to keep living in fear without seeing more of the land I call home? No, I thought. I decided to change that. So I gathered my savings and started traveling across Kasaka. I¡¯ll keep going until I¡¯ve seen enough and return home." San was impressed. He hadn¡¯t expected to misjudge someone so badly. Then he remembered the bartender from earlier. Now he felt a little guilty. But something else caught his attention. "You said you¡¯re from Karuni?" "Yes." "Why are you afraid of pirates when the army has such a strong presence there? I¡¯ve heard they protect the people from them." "Well, they do. But we pay a price for that protection¡ªjust like the people here pay a price for their security. I don¡¯t know what the cost is for this city, but¡­ In Karuni, most people live in fear of what will happen to them if they can no longer afford to pay that price." "A price? What do you mea¡ª" Just as he was about to ask, he spotted one of his comrades. His fellow soldier pointed at his arm, signaling that it was time for their patrol. "Oh. Damn! Sorry, but I have to go." "All right then. Have a good evening!" "Thanks, you too!" With that, he joined his comrade, and together they made their way to the museum. But the entire time, one question lingered in his mind¡ª What price was the traveler talking about? What cost did the people of Kasaka have to pay for their security? 151: The Intruder They made their way back to the museum, where Munkan and the others were already waiting. They had arrived precisely at sunset. Shortly after, the plan for the night was explained to them. This time, the ground floor would be more heavily guarded, so San and his fellow recruits were assigned to patrol the upper floors. San was sent to the fourth floor along with two comrades. The three of them walked through the level, carrying flame lamps, chatting briefly as they moved. Once again, they discussed Funo, theorizing about what could have made him so unhinged. They all hoped they wouldn¡¯t anger him any further and could finish their time in Kunkan without incident. Eventually, they split up to search the entire floor more efficiently. San hesitated at first but ultimately agreed. Now, he was alone again. But this time, he had made a decision. If he got the chance, he would catch the intruder. Yes, he feared Funo¡¯s wrath, but he would rather risk it and solve this problem quickly rather than wait for their lazy commander to finally feel compelled to deal with it himself. So, he started thinking. Where would the intruder likely enter from? This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. Just like the other floors, there were no windows to break in through. There was, however, a ventilation system¡­ But there was no way someone would squeeze through that. It would be far too noisy. So, if he were trying to break into the museum, where would he enter? Suddenly, he heard the faintest creak behind him. He spun around quickly. An emergency exit! The door was slightly ajar. San swiftly turned off his lamp and crept toward it. Could the intruder be standing right on the other side? Was he just waiting for the right moment to slip inside? If so, San was about to surprise him. Now, he was right next to the door. The darkness made it nearly impossible to see anything. But that was his advantage. Silently, he raised his lamp, preparing himself. He took one last deep breath and counted down in his head. One. Two. THREE! He lunged through the door, swinging blindly¡ª But he hit nothing. Quickly, he switched the light back on. There was no one. He stood still for a moment, listening closely. No sounds. Except for the distant footsteps of his comrades. He exhaled in relief. Maybe he was starting to get paranoid. Then¡ªsomeone shoved him from behind. Before he could react, someone grabbed him by his uniform and dragged him at lightning speed through the exit. The emergency exit led to the rooftop. And now, here they were. But before the assailant could throw him off, San instinctively grabbed onto them, clutching their clothes. This caused both of them to tumble across the rooftop, making a loud commotion. San barely managed to catch a glimpse of the person¡ª They were wrapped in a thick cloak. The intruder! He was sure of it! As quickly as possible, he scrambled to his feet and lunged at the figure. Somehow, he managed to tackle them down. The intruder fell, and San pinned him to the ground. "Let¡¯s see who you are, criminal!" he growled, yanking back the hood. Then¡ª Confusion. San didn¡¯t recognize the man beneath him. But¡­ He had seen this face before. His mind scrambled, trying to recall where. Then it hit him¡ª Back in Kaisan, just before their deployment, he had seen this man¡¯s wanted poster. It was him. The one who, a month ago, had caused a massive uprising in Kurani. The one who had fought against Commander Fetu. The one who had escaped the army¡¯s grasp. San had just caught Kawao!